JP2021007892A - Game machine - Google Patents

Abstract

To provide a game machine with enhanced performance effect.SOLUTION: A game machine executes an effect performance (first display performance) to display an effect image 630 while keeping a movable decorative member 141 in an approached state (second state) due to execution of a movable performance to be in the approached state on the front side of a display screen 7a. Then, when the game machine executes a big winning notification performance (second display performance), the movable decorative member 141 is configured to be brought into a separated state (first state) on the basis of the execution of the big winning notification performance. According to the configuration, when the big winning notification performance is executed through the movable performance and effect performance, the portion of the display screen 7a covered by the movable decorative member 141 is relatively small. As a result, it is possible to enhance the performance effect by giving a change in the appearance of the performance when the big winning notification performance is executed through the movable performance and the effect performance.SELECTED DRAWING: Figure 61

Description

The present invention relates to a gaming machine such as a pachinko gaming machine (ballistic gaming machine).

Conventionally, a game machine that plays a game using a game medium such as a game ball or a game medal is known. In this type of gaming machine, there are those configured so that various effects using an image display unit for effects, movable accessories, and the like are executed according to the progress of the game (see, for example, Patent Document 1). ).

Japanese Unexamined Patent Publication No. 2013-59691

The production performed by the game machine plays an important role in improving the interest of the game, but there is room for further improvement in enhancing the production effect.

The present invention has been made in view of the above circumstances, and an object of the present invention is to provide a game machine having an enhanced effect.

The present invention employs the following means in order to solve the above-mentioned problems.

The game machine of means 1
A game machine capable of playing a game using a predetermined game medium.
A display screen that can display images and
A movable effect member that can operate between the first state and the second state,
Equipped with an effect control means that can control the effect executed with the game,
For the above production
The first display effect of displaying a predetermined image on the display screen and
A second display effect that displays a predetermined image on the display screen, and
There is a movable effect that activates the movable effect member in the first state to bring the movable effect member into the second state.
When the movable effect member is in the first state, the portion of the display screen covered by the movable effect member is smaller than that in the second state.
The effect control means
While executing the movable effect, the first display effect is executed while maintaining the movable effect member in the second state due to the execution of the movable effect in the second state, and then the second display effect is executed. Is possible and
When the second display effect is executed after the movable effect and the first display effect, the gist is that the movable effect member is operated based on the execution of the second display effect to bring the first state.

According to such a game machine, when the movable effect member is in the first state, the portion of the display screen covered by the movable effect member is smaller than when it is in the second state. That is, when the movable effect member is in the second state, the portion of the display screen covered by the movable effect member is larger than when it is in the first state. Then, when the movable effect is executed and the movable effect member is in the second state, the first display effect is executed in that state, and then the second display effect is executed, based on the execution of the second display effect. The movable effect member shifts from the second state to the first state. Therefore, when the second display effect is executed after the movable effect and the first display effect, the movable effect member is in the second state and is covered by the movable effect member before the execution of the second display effect. The portion of the display screen is relatively large, and the first display effect is executed in that state, while when the second display effect is executed, the movable effect member is in the first state, and the movable effect member causes the movable effect member. The part of the display screen that is covered is relatively small. As a result, it is possible to change the appearance of the effect when the second display effect is executed through the movable effect and the first display effect, and enhance the effect.

The gaming machine of means 2 is the gaming machine of means 1 described above.
The gist of the first display effect is that a predetermined effect image is displayed on the display screen.

According to such a game machine, in the first display effect executed in which the movable effect member is in the second state by executing the movable effect, a predetermined effect image is displayed on the display screen. Therefore, the movable effect member in the second state and the effect image displayed on the display screen when the movable effect member is in the second state can be combined to give a visual impact to the player. It becomes. This makes it possible to enhance the effect of the movable effect when it is executed.

The gaming machine of means 3 is the gaming machine of means 1 or 2 described above.
When the result of the determination executed based on the establishment of the predetermined condition is a specific result, it is possible to execute a special game in which a predetermined benefit can be given to the player.
The effect control means can control the effect based on the result of the determination.
The gist of the second display effect is that a specific image suggesting that the result of the determination is the specific result is displayed on the display screen.

According to such a game machine, in the second display effect executed through the movable effect and the first display effect, a specific image suggesting that the result of the determination is a specific result is displayed on the display screen. To. Therefore, it is possible to increase the player's expectation for the special game from the execution of the movable effect and the first display effect to the execution of the second display effect. As a result, it is possible to further enhance the effect when the second display effect is executed after the movable effect and the first display effect.

The gaming machine of the means 4 is the gaming machine of any one of the above-mentioned means 1 to 3.
The gist is that the movable effect and the second display effect executed after the first display effect are terminated after the movable effect member is in the first state.

According to such a game machine, when the second display effect is executed after the movable effect and the first display effect, the second display effect ends after the movable effect member is in the first state. Therefore, it is possible to clearly show the image displayed on the display screen by executing the second display effect. This makes it possible to make the second display effect more effective.

According to the above invention, it is possible to provide a game machine having an enhanced effect.

It is a front view of the game machine which concerns on embodiment of this invention. It is a back view of the gaming machine which concerns on embodiment of this invention. It is a front view which shows the structure of the game board of the Example of this invention. It is an enlarged view of the main display shown in FIG. 3, and is the figure which shows the display which the game machine includes. It is a block diagram which shows the electrical structure of the game machine. It is a table showing the correspondence between the type of big hit and the opening pattern of the big winning opening. It is a table which shows various random numbers acquired by a game control microcomputer. (A) is a jackpot determination table, (B) is a jackpot type determination table, (C) is a normal symbol hit determination table, and (D) is a normal symbol variation pattern selection table. It is a fluctuation pattern table. It is a flowchart of a main control main process. It is a flowchart of interrupt processing. It is a flowchart of a start port sensor detection process. It is a flowchart of a normal figure operation process. It is a flowchart of a normal symbol standby process. It is a flowchart of a normal symbol hit / miss judgment process. It is a flowchart of a normal symbol random number shift process. It is a flowchart of a process during a normal symbol change. It is a flowchart of a normal symbol determination process. It is a flowchart of ordinary electric accessory processing. It is a flowchart of a special figure operation process. It is a flowchart of a special symbol standby process. FIG. 2 is a flowchart of a pass / fail determination process. FIG. 2 is a flowchart of a variation pattern selection process. FIG. 2 is a flowchart of a variation pattern selection process. Special Figure 2 It is a flowchart of a random number shift process. FIG. 1 is a flowchart of a pass / fail determination process. FIG. 1 is a flowchart of a variation pattern selection process. FIG. 1 is a flowchart of a variation pattern selection process. Special Figure 1 is a flowchart of random number shift processing. It is a flowchart of the process during special symbol change. It is a flowchart of a special symbol determination process. It is a flowchart of special electric accessory processing (big hit game). It is a flowchart of V round processing. It is a flowchart of a game state setting process. It is a flowchart of a specific area sensor detection process. It is a flowchart of a non-specific area sensor detection process. It is a flowchart of the start ball entry processing. It is a flowchart of power-off monitoring processing. It is a flowchart of a sub-control main process. It is a flowchart of reception interrupt processing. It is a flowchart of 2ms timer interrupt processing. It is a flowchart of 10ms timer interrupt processing. It is a flowchart of the received command analysis process. It is a flowchart of the received command analysis process. It is a flowchart of the variation effect start processing. It is a flowchart of the movable production related processing. It is a flowchart of an opening effect selection process. It is a table which shows the correspondence between the type of a big hit and the movable piece operation timing (the first predetermined value and the second predetermined value) in a V round. It is a timing chart which shows the relationship between the 2nd prize opening sensor and a specific area (movable piece). It is a schematic diagram of the 2nd prize winning device. (A) is a table showing the types of variable effect patterns, and (B) is a table showing the types of opening effects. It is a figure which shows the flow (the effect example 1) of the effect when the big hit variation effect including a movable effect is executed. It is a figure which shows the flow (the effect example 1) of the effect when the big hit variation effect including a movable effect is executed. It is a figure which shows the flow (the effect example 2) of the effect when the big hit variation effect including a movable effect is executed. It is a figure which shows the flow (the effect example 3) of the effect when the opening effect including a movable effect is executed. It is a figure which shows the flow (the effect example 3) of the effect when the V round is executed through the opening effect including a movable effect. It is a front view which shows the state (first state) which is the game board of Example 2 and is not executing the movable effect. It is a front view which shows the state (second state) that the movable effect was executed in the game board of Example 2. It is a flowchart of the movable effect-related processing of Example 2. It is a figure which shows the flow from the SP reach effect to the hit branch timing in the variation effect of Example 2. It is a continuation from FIG. 60, and is the figure which shows the flow of the effect when the movable effect is not executed (off pattern), and when the movable effect is executed (big hit pattern). It is a flowchart of the movable production-related processing of Example 3. It is a figure which shows the flow of the production from the SP reach production to the development production in the jackpot variation production including the movable production of the third embodiment. It is a continuation from FIG. 63, and is the figure which shows the flow of the production from the stop display of the big hit effect symbol to the opening period.

Next, an embodiment of the present invention will be described with reference to examples. In the following, the game medium used for the game is a game ball, and this is a pachinko game machine (ball game machine) capable of advancing the game by firing the game ball toward the game board surface (game area). An example to which the invention is applied will be described. Specifically, a symbol variable game (also simply referred to as "variable game") in which a special symbol is variablely displayed and then stopped and displayed based on the entry of the game ball into the starting port is performed, and the special symbol is performed in the variable game. Is stopped and displayed with a jackpot symbol, for example, a so-called "type 1" gaming machine that enables a jackpot game (special game) in which a player can be given a predetermined amount of game profit (for example, a prize ball). explain.

In the following description, the front side (front side) is simply the front side (front side) when the game machine is viewed from the front, and is the side (front side) where the player is located during the game. Further, the rear side (rear side) is simply the back side (back side) side when the game machine is viewed from the front. Furthermore, the upper side (upper side), lower side (lower side), left side (left side), and right side (right side) are the upper, lower, left, and right directions when the game machine is viewed from the front. For example, it refers to the upper side, the lower side, the left side, and the right side in FIGS. 1 and 3.

As shown in FIGS. 1 to 3, the pachinko game machine 1 of the first embodiment includes a game machine frame 50 and a game board 2 mounted in the game machine frame 50, and the game board 2 is a game machine. It is detachably configured from the frame 50. FIG. 3 shows the surface side (board surface side) of the game board 2 removed from the game machine frame 50.

The game machine frame 50 includes a front frame 51 having a decorative surface, a main body frame 52 for attaching a game board 2 and the like, and an outer frame 53 for attaching the pachinko game machine 1 to the island equipment of the hall. The front frame 51, the main body frame 52, and the outer frame 53 are pivotally supported on one side end side and are configured to be openable and closable, respectively.

The front frame 51 includes a launch handle 60 for launching a game ball with a launch intensity according to the amount of operation (rotation angle) of the player, and a hit ball capable of storing the game ball and supplying the game ball to the launcher side. A supply plate (upper plate) 61 and a surplus ball tray (lower plate) 62 for storing game balls that cannot be accommodated in the hit ball supply plate 61 are provided. Further, the front frame 51 has a first effect button 63a and a second effect button 63b that can be operated by the player (referring to one or both of these two effect buttons, and is also simply referred to as an "effect button 63". ), A decorative frame lamp 66 capable of emitting various lights according to the game situation, a speaker 67 capable of emitting various sounds (sound effects) according to the game situation, and the like. ing. The frame lamp 66 is composed of, for example, an LED.

The effect button 63 functions as an input means capable of inputting by an external operation, and can be operated during execution of a game effect that is executed as the game progresses. The player can properly use the effect buttons to be used according to the type of game effect. For example, when the first effect button 63a or the second effect button 63b is operated during the execution of the game effect, a predetermined operation-corresponding effect is performed based on the operation. The effect button 63 (input means) is also referred to as an "operation means", the first effect button 63a is also referred to as a "first input means" or a "first operation means", and the second effect button 63b is referred to as a "first". Also referred to as "2 input means" or "second operating means".

The configuration of the effect button 63 is not limited to the embodiment of the present embodiment, and any input can be performed by the player. For example, the player directly touches the button portion to perform the input. It may be an input means (for example, a haunting type, a touch sensor type, etc.), or a non-contact type input means (photoelectric type, etc.) that detects that a part of the player's body is in close proximity and inputs. There may be. Further, it may be a tilting type operating means such as an operating lever or an operating stick that can be tilted in the front-rear direction or the left-right direction. Further, in this embodiment, two effect buttons, a first effect button 63a and a second effect button 63b, are provided, but the number of effect buttons may be one or three or more. ..

The game board 2 is formed with a game area 3 in which a game ball launched by the operation of the launch handle 60 flows down, surrounded by a rail member 4. A plurality of game nails 16 for guiding a game ball are projected in the game area 3, and a ball return prevention piece 6 is provided at the tip of the rail member 4. The ball return prevention piece 6 is for preventing the game ball once guided to the game area from returning to the launching device side. Further, the game board 2 is also provided with a decorative board lamp 5 (see FIG. 5) capable of emitting various lights according to the situation of the game. The board lamp 5 is composed of, for example, an LED.

Near the center of the game board 2 (game area 3), an image display device 7 including a display screen 7a capable of displaying an image is provided as a display means (effect display means) for the effect. The image display device 7 of this embodiment is composed of a liquid crystal display.

The image display device 7 is provided on the back surface side of the game board 2 so that the display screen 7a faces the opening provided in the substantially center of the game board 2 (game area 3). Through the opening, the player can visually recognize the display screen 7 (display content). On the display screen 7a of the image display device 7, there is an effect symbol display area 7b (also referred to as an “effect symbol display unit”) on which the effect symbols 8L, 8C, 8R (also simply referred to as “effect symbol 8”) are displayed. It is provided.

The effect symbol 8 performs variable display in synchronization with the variable display of the first special symbol and the second special symbol described later. As a mode of variable display, for example, there is a mode of scrolling in the up / down, left / right, diagonal directions, etc. In this embodiment, in principle, scrolling is performed from top to bottom. The effect symbol display area 7b has, for example, three symbol display areas of "left", "middle", and "right", the left effect symbol 8L is displayed in the left symbol display area, and the middle symbol display area is in the middle. The effect symbol 8C is displayed, and the right effect symbol 8R is displayed in the symbol display area on the right.

The effect symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R of this embodiment include numerical symbols (symbol types) representing the numbers "1" to "9", respectively, and the numerical symbols are displayed in order. Specifically, the variable display of the effect symbol 8 is performed by scrolling the numerical symbols in the order of "1" → "2" ... "8" → "9" (ascending order). When it reaches "9", it returns to "1" and the scroll display is repeated until the end of fluctuation (stop display).

Depending on the combination of left, middle, and right (stop display mode) displayed (stop display) on the display screen 7a (effect symbol display area 7b), the first special symbol display 41a (“first special symbol display unit”” described later The result of the variation display of the first special symbol displayed on (also referred to as), and the variation display of the second special symbol displayed on the second special symbol display 41b (also referred to as the "second special symbol display unit"). The result of the above, that is, the result of the special symbol winning / failing determination (also simply referred to as “winning / failing determination”) is displayed so that the player can easily recognize it. In this embodiment, the order in which the three effect symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R that are variablely displayed are stopped and displayed (stop order) is, in principle, "left → right → middle". That is, the stop symbol having the first stop order is the left effect symbol 8L, the stop symbol having the second stop order is the right effect symbol 8R, and the stop symbol having the third stop order (last) is the middle effect symbol 8C. .. The stop symbol with the first stop order is also called the "first stop symbol", the stop symbol with the second stop order is also called the "second stop symbol", and the stop symbol with the third stop order is the third stop symbol. This is also called a "third stop symbol" or a "final stop symbol".

Here, any or all of the first special symbol, the second special symbol, and the effect symbol 8 are referred to simply as "design" or "identification information". In addition, the ordinary symbol is also called "ordinary symbol" or "ordinary identification information", the special symbol is also called "special symbol", and the first special symbol is "special diagram 1" or "first special symbol". The second special symbol is also called "special figure 2" or "second special figure". Further, it refers to any or all of the image display device 7 for displaying the effect symbol 8, the first special symbol display 41a for displaying the first special symbol, and the second special symbol display 41b for displaying the second special symbol. Also referred to as "identification information display means".

The stop display mode of the effect symbol 8 can be defined as follows. For example, when the result of the special symbol hit / fail judgment is a big hit, the doublet such as "222" or "777" may be stopped and displayed with the same triplet (also referred to as "big hit effect symbol"). It is possible. In addition, in the case of deviation, at least one of the three symbols such as "637" and "373" is different, and the production symbol is stopped and displayed with a different design (also referred to as "off effect symbol"). Is possible. As a result, the player can easily grasp the progress of the game by looking at the stopped display of the effect symbol 8. That is, in general, the player directly grasps the result of the special symbol hit / miss judgment (big hit or miss) by looking at the special symbol displayed on the first special symbol display 41a or the second special symbol display 41b. Instead of doing so, the effect symbol 8 displayed on the display screen 7a (effect symbol display area 7b) is viewed and grasped.

It should be noted that the left, middle, and right symbol display areas do not have to be provided separately, and may be one symbol display area for displaying three effect symbols. Further, in this embodiment, the left, middle, and right effect symbols 8 are displayed. For example, a matrix-like symbol display area of 3 rows and 3 columns is provided on the display screen to display 9 effect symbols. Then, when each symbol is stopped and displayed after the variable display, the stop mode (stop symbol) of the effect symbol can be displayed by the arrangement of each row (symbol combination) of one vertical row, one horizontal row, and one diagonal row, or the symbol display area (symbol display area). The number of effect symbols and the mode of the symbol display area are particularly questionable, such as dividing the effect symbol display area) into a plurality of (for example, four) areas and performing variable display and stop display of three effect symbols in each area. Absent.

Here, among the results of the special symbol hit / fail judgment, the "big hit" is also referred to as a "specific result", and the "missing" is also referred to as a "non-specific result". In addition, among the stop display modes of the identification information (special symbol and / or effect symbol), the stop display mode corresponding to the case where the result of the special symbol hit / fail judgment is "big hit" is referred to as "big hit mode" or "specific mode". Alternatively, it is also referred to as "specific display result", and the stop display mode corresponding to the case where the result of the special symbol hit / miss judgment is "off" is also referred to as "off mode", "non-specific mode" or "non-specific display result". Further, the variation display executed based on the result of the special symbol winning / failing determination is also called "big hit variation" or "specific variation game", and is based on the result of the special symbol winning / failing determination being wrong. The fluctuation display executed by the player is also referred to as "outside fluctuation" or "non-specific fluctuation game".

On the display screen 7a of the image display device 7, in addition to the game effect using the effect symbol 8 as described above (also referred to as “effect symbol game effect”), the jackpot game effect (“directed symbol game effect”) executed in association with the jackpot game Various effects related to the game (effect display) such as "special game effect") and demonstration effect for waiting for customers are displayed. Then, in various production displays such as the production design game production and the jackpot game production, various images constituting the production display such as a background image and a character image are displayed in addition to the production symbols such as numbers. In addition, the production design game production is also referred to as "variable production".

Further, on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7, there is a first effect hold display area 9c (first effect hold display unit) that displays the first effect hold 9a according to the number of stored first special figure hold described later. A second effect hold display area 9d (second effect hold display unit) that displays the second effect hold 9b according to the number of stored second effect hold 9b described later is provided (see FIG. 3). Depending on the display mode (number of displays) of the first effect hold 9a, the number of stored first special figure hold displayed on the first special figure hold indicator 43a, which will be described later, can be easily shown to the player. Similarly, the display mode (number of displays) of the second effect hold 9b allows the player to easily indicate to the player the number of memories of the second special figure hold displayed on the second special figure hold indicator 43b, which will be described later. .. It should be noted that one or both of the first production hold 9a and the second production hold 9b is also referred to as "production hold". In addition, the production hold is also referred to as a "holding symbol". Further, various images displayed on the display screen 7a, such as an effect symbol, a background image, a character image, and an effect hold (holding symbol), are also collectively referred to as an "effect image".

A center decorative body 10 that surrounds the display screen 7a (effect symbol display area 7b) is provided near the center of the game area 3 and in front of the image display device 7. The center decorative body 10 is made of a plastic (resin) molded product, and is attached to the surface (front surface) of the game board 2 as a frame-shaped part (board part) having an open center. .. The display screen 7a of the image display device 7 becomes visible through the central opening of the center decoration body 10.

At the lower part of the center decorative body 10, a stage portion 11 having a game ball rolling surface on which the game ball can roll is provided. Further, a hollow warp portion 12 is provided on the left portion of the center decoration body 10. The warp portion 12 is provided with a warp inlet and a warp outlet, receives a game ball flowing down the game area 3 from the warp inlet, discharges the game ball from the warp outlet, and guides the game ball to the stage portion 11. The game ball guided to the rolling surface of the stage portion 11 has a higher possibility than the game ball not guided to the stage portion 11, and can enter the first starting port 20 described later. Further, on the upper part of the center decorative body 10, a decorative member 13 having an illumination member (board lamp 5) such as an LED and capable of lighting according to the game state is arranged. The gaming state means the state of the gaming machine when the game is played on the pachinko gaming machine 1.

Further, on the left side of the center decorative body 10 and in front of the warp portion 12, a movable decorative member 14 that can be operated according to the game effect is provided. The movable decorative member 14 functions as a movable role object (gimmick) for an effect that can be operated on the front side (near) of the display screen 7a.

The movable decorative member 14 of this embodiment is composed of a modeled object having a flag as a motif, and is usually located in front of (starting point) of the warp portion 12 as shown in FIG. 3, and the entire flag. Is tilted to the left (also referred to as "non-operating state" or "first state"). Then, when a predetermined operating condition is satisfied, the movable decorative member 14 at the start point position (standby position) moves to the predetermined end point position (the left side of the display screen 7a) along the left opening edge (left side of the display screen 7a) of the central opening of the center decoration body 10. The movable decorative member 14 moves (ascends) to the operating position), or the movable decorative member 14 that has reached the end point position tilts to the right (toward the right opening edge of the center decorative body 10) (see FIG. 52). A state in which the movable decorative member 14 is moved (raised) from the start point position to the end point position (a state in which the movable decorative member 14 is operated in the first operating mode), or a state in which the movable decorative member 14 is tilted to the right at the end point position (second operating mode). The state of operation) is also referred to as an "operating state" or a "second state".

That is, the movable decorative member 14 of the present embodiment is tilted to the right at the start point position (non-operating state, first state), the ending point position (operating state, second state), or the ending point position. It is configured to be operable between the states (operating state, second state).

The operation mode (operation pattern) of the movable decorative member 14 includes a first operation mode in which the movable decorative member 14 moves (rises) from the start point position to the end point position along the left opening edge of the center decoration body 10, and a right side after moving to the end point position. There is a second mode of operation that leans toward. Then, when the predetermined first operating condition is satisfied, the movable decorative member 14 operates in the first operating mode, and when the predetermined second operating condition is satisfied, the movable decorative member 14 operated in the first operating mode further operates in the second operating mode. It operates in an operating mode. In this way, the movable decorative member 14 is operated in the first operating mode or the second operating mode, and the movable decorative member 14 in the non-operating state (first state) is moved to the end point position or moved to the right at the end point position. The effect of tilting (changing to the second state) is also called "movable effect".

When the movable decorative member 14 operates in the first operating mode or the second operating mode and is at the end point position (that is, when it is in the second state), a predetermined return condition (also referred to as "end condition") is satisfied. Then, the movable decorative member 14 tilts to the left and moves (descends) from the end point position to the start point position (this is also referred to as a "third operation mode"). As a result, the movable decorative member 14 returns (returns) to the non-operating state (first state), and the movable effect is completed.

Further, when the movable decorative member 14 is operated in the first operating mode or the second operating mode and is in the end point position (second state), the player returns before the above-mentioned return condition (end condition) is satisfied. Even when an instruction is input, the movable decorative member 14 operates in the third operating mode and returns (returns) to the non-operating state (first state). The return instruction is input, for example, by operating (for example, pressing once) a return instruction button (not shown) provided on the front frame 51 separately from the effect button 63 and which can be operated by the player. be able to. Specifically, similarly to the above-mentioned effect button detection switches 63c and 63d, a return instruction button detection switch (not shown) capable of detecting whether or not the return instruction button is operated (ON / OFF) is provided, and the switch is used. It is possible to configure the sub-control board 90 to input the detection signal so that the return instruction is input when the detection signal is turned ON. In this case, the operation (input) of the return instruction button may be enabled when the movable decorative member 14 is in the end point position (second state).

It should be noted that the return instruction is given by operating the effect button 63 in a predetermined operation mode (for example, pressing and holding for 10 seconds) when the movable decorative member 14 is in the end point position (second state) without providing the return instruction button. You may be able to input.

Further, when the movable decorative member 14 is operated in the first operating mode or the second operating mode and is in the end point position (second state), when a predetermined additional operating condition is satisfied, the effect using the movable decorative member 14 ( Movable production) is additionally executed. This additional movable effect (also referred to as "additional movable effect") is executed in association with the opening effect, the round effect, and the ST mode effect, as will be described later. In the additional movable effect, the movable decorative member 14 operates in the operating mode for the additional movable effect.

The operation of the movable decorative member 14 is realized by a drive mechanism (not shown) including a slide rail, a gear, a motor, etc. for moving the movable decorative member 14 up and down and tilting it left and right. Since the configuration of the drive mechanism itself is not related to the gist of the present invention, detailed description of the drive mechanism will be omitted. Further, the movable effect in which the movable decorative member 14 operates will be described later.

Here, the display screen 7a and the image display device 7 capable of performing a display effect for displaying various images according to the game situation are also referred to as a "display effect unit" or a "display effect means", and the game is being produced. The movable decorative member 14 capable of performing a movable effect by operating in a predetermined operation mode is also referred to as a "movable effect member" or a "movable effect means". In addition to the movable decorative member 14, the effect button 63 is also "movable" when it is possible to execute a movable effect that operates the effect button 63 in a predetermined operation mode, for example, the effect button 63 vibrates or moves up and down. It can be said to be a "directing member" or a "movable directing means". Further, the speaker 67 capable of producing various sounds (sound effects) according to the situation of the game is also referred to as a "sound effect section" or a "sound effect means", and is referred to as a "sound effect means" depending on the situation of the game. The board surface lamp 5, the frame lamp 66, and the decorative member 13 capable of performing a light effect that emits various lights are also referred to as a "light effect unit" or a "light effect means". In addition to the board lamp 5, for example, the effect button 63 and the firing handle 60 have a built-in illumination member such as an LED like the decoration member 13, and are lit according to the game situation by the action of the illumination member. When blinking or the like, these effect buttons 63 and the firing handle 60 can also be said to be "light effect means". Further, the "display effect means", the "movable effect means", the "sound effect means" and the "light effect means" are also collectively referred to as "effect means".

Below the image display device 7 (below the stage portion 11) in the game area 3, a fixed prize is provided with a non-variable first starting port 20 in which the ease of entering the game ball (ball entry possibility) does not change. A device 19 is provided. Based on the entry of the game ball into the first starting port 20, a random number for determining whether or not the special symbol is correct is acquired, and when a predetermined predetermined condition is satisfied, the determination of whether or not the first special symbol is correct (“1st special symbol”). (Also referred to as “hit / fail judgment”) is executed, the first special symbol is displayed in a variable manner, and is stopped and displayed based on the result of the hit / fail judgment.

On the right side of the image display device 7 in the game area 3, a variable second starting port 21 (also referred to as a “variable starting port”) that changes the ease of entering the game ball (possibility of entering the ball) is provided. A variable winning device 22 is provided. Based on the entry of the game ball into the second starting port 21, a random number for determining whether the special symbol is correct or not is acquired, and when a predetermined predetermined condition is satisfied, the accuracy of the second special symbol is determined (the second special symbol is determined). ) Is executed, the second special symbol is displayed in a variable manner, and is stopped and displayed based on the result of the hit / fail judgment.

That is, the variation display of the first special symbol (first special symbol hit / fail judgment, first special symbol variation game) is executed based on the entry of the game ball into the first starting port 20, and the variation of the second special symbol. The display (second special symbol hit / miss determination, second special symbol variable game) is executed based on the entry of the game ball into the second starting port 21.

It should be noted that the first special symbol hit / fail judgment executed based on the entry of the game ball into the first starting port 20 and the second special symbol executed based on the entry of the game ball into the second starting port 21. The hit / fail judgment, that is, the special symbol hit / fail judgment executed based on the entry of the game ball into the starting port is an example of the “judgment executed based on the establishment of a predetermined condition”.

The variable winning device 22 includes an opening / closing member (blade member) 23, and opens / closes the second starting port 21 by the operation of the opening / closing member 23. Due to the opening / closing operation of the opening / closing member 23, the second starting port 21 is divided into a first mode (closed state) and a second mode (open state) in which the game ball is more likely to enter than the first mode. It can be changed. The opening / closing member 23 is driven by a second starting port solenoid 24 (see FIG. 5). In the present embodiment, the second starting port 21 is capable of entering the game ball only when the opening / closing member 23 is in the open state, and is unable to enter the game ball when the opening / closing member 23 is in the closed state. .. If the opening / closing member 23 is more difficult to enter when the opening / closing member 23 is in the open state than when the opening / closing member 23 is in the open state, the second starting port 21 is completely closed when the opening / closing member 23 is in the closed state. It does not have to be the one that makes it impossible to enter the ball.

To the right of the first starting port 20 in the game area 3, a variable first large winning opening 30 (“first variable ball entry port”” in which the ease of entering the game ball (ball entry possibility) changes. The first large winning device 31 equipped with (also referred to as) and the variable second large winning opening 35 (“second variable entry opening”” in which the ease of entering a game ball (possibility of entering a ball) changes. A second prize-winning device 36 equipped with (also referred to as)) is provided. In this embodiment, the second large winning opening 35 (second large winning device 36) is arranged directly above the first large winning opening 30 (first large winning device 31). It also refers to one or both of the first big winning opening 30 (first big winning device 31) and the second big winning opening 35 (second big winning device 36), and is also called a "special ball opening".

The first prize-winning device 31 includes an opening / closing member 32, and opens and closes the first prize-winning opening 30 by the operation of the opening / closing member 32. The opening / closing member 32 is driven by the first large winning opening solenoid 33 (see FIG. 5). A game ball can enter the first large winning opening 30 only when the opening / closing member 32 is in the open state. Due to the opening / closing operation of the opening / closing member 32, the first large winning opening 30 changes into a ball-entry state (closed state) in which the game ball cannot enter and a ball-entry state (open state) in which the game ball can enter. Can be.

The second big prize device 36 includes an opening / closing member 37, and opens and closes the second big winning opening 35 by the operation of the opening / closing member 37. The opening / closing member 37 is driven by the second large winning opening solenoid 38 (see FIG. 5). The second large winning opening 35 allows a game ball to enter only when the opening / closing member 37 is in the open state. Due to the opening / closing operation of the opening / closing member 37, the second large winning opening 35 changes into a ball-entry state (closed state) in which the game ball cannot enter and a ball-entry state (open state) in which the game ball can enter. Can be.

Further, the second special winning device 36 has a specific area 39 (also referred to as “V area”) and a non-specific area 49 (also referred to as “non-V area”) through which the game ball entered into the second large winning opening 35 can pass. ), And a movable piece 150 for guiding (sorting) the game ball that has entered the second special winning opening 35 to the specific area 39 or the non-specific area 49.

Although the details will be described later, the movable piece 150 operates based on the number of game balls detected by the second large winning opening sensor 35a described later, and is driven by the movable piece solenoid 151 (see FIG. 5). To. When the movable piece solenoid 151 is OFF, that is, when the movable piece 150 is not operating (non-operating state), the game ball that has entered the second special winning opening 35 is a non-specific area 49 (area other than the specific area). Induced by, it becomes impossible to pass through the specific region 39. On the other hand, when the movable piece solenoid 151 is ON, that is, when the movable piece 150 is operating (operating state), the game ball that has entered the second special winning opening 35 is guided to the specific area 39 and is guided to the specific area 39. It is possible to pass through 39 (also referred to as "V passage"). The movable piece 150 is also referred to as a "movable member" or a "distribution member". Further, the second large winning device 36 or the second large winning opening 35 including the movable piece 150 is also referred to as a “V attacker”.

In the pachinko gaming machine 1, at least one of the game balls that have entered the second major winning opening 35 passes through the specific area 39, and this (passing V) is detected by the specific area sensor 39a described later. Based on this, it is configured to generate the high probability state described later. The high probability state is one of the game benefits given to the player separately from the special game. The pachinko gaming machine 1 that determines whether or not to generate a high-probability state based on the presence or absence of the game ball passing through the specific area 39 is a so-called "V probability machine", and the specific area 39 is a probability variation operation. It functions as a mouth (probability change area). Such a specific area 39 is not provided in the first grand prize device 31 (first grand prize opening 30). The specific area 39 may be provided in the first prize-winning device 31 (first prize-winning opening 30).

Here, the configuration of the second prize-winning device 36 will be described in detail. FIG. 50 is a schematic view showing the second grand prize device 36. As shown in the figure, all the game balls that have entered the second large winning opening 35 pass through a predetermined game ball guiding passage in the second large winning device, and all of them pass through the second large winning opening sensor 35a (“winning ball”). It passes through the "detecting means" or "ball entry detection sensor"). The second large winning opening sensor 35a is a sensor for detecting the entry of a game ball into the second large winning opening 35, and based on the detection by the second large winning opening sensor 35a, the second major winning opening 35 is reached. It is possible to count the number of balls entered. When the game ball is detected by the second large winning opening sensor 35a, the detected number (that is, the number of balls entered) is rounded by the number of balls entered counting means (not shown) provided in the RAM of the main control unit 80 described later. It is counted in units. This counting result (counting value) is cleared at the end of the round.

Further, the game ball detected by the second special winning opening sensor 35a then always passes through the specific area 39 or the non-specific area 49 through the predetermined game ball guidance passage (FIGS. 50A and 50B). ). The specific area 39 allows the game ball to pass only when the movable piece 150 is operating (operating state), in other words, only when the specific area 39 is open. A specific area sensor 39a is provided in the specific area 39, and a game ball passing through the specific area 39 is detected by the specific area sensor 39a (see FIG. 50B). The specific area sensor 39a is a sensor for detecting the passage of the game ball into the specific area 39. A non-specific area sensor 49a is provided in the non-specific area 49, and a game ball passing through the non-specific area 49 is detected by the non-specific area sensor 49a (see FIG. 50A). The non-specific area sensor 49a is a sensor for detecting the passage of the game ball into the non-specific area 49. The specific area sensor 39a and the non-specific area detection sensor 49a are also sensors for detecting the discharge of the game ball from the second special winning opening 35, and are based on the detection of the specific area sensor 39a and the non-specific area detection sensor 49a. It is possible to count the number of emissions from the second large winning opening 35. When the game ball is detected by the specific area sensor 39a or the non-specific area detection sensor 49a, the detection number (that is, the number of discharges) is the discharge number counting means (not shown) provided in the RAM of the main control unit 80 described later. Is counted in round units. This counting result (counting value) is cleared at the end of the round.

Further, the number of game balls detected by the specific area sensor 39a is counted as the number of passing through the specific area by a specific area passing counting means (not shown) provided in the RAM of the main control unit 80, which will be described later, and the non-specific area sensor. The number of game balls detected by 49a is counted as the number of non-specific region passages by a non-specific region passage counting means (not shown) provided in the RAM of the main control unit 80, which will be described later. These counts are also performed in round units, and the count result (count value) is cleared at the end of the round.

A specific area sensor 39a (also referred to as a "first emission detecting means" or a "first emission detecting sensor") and a non-specific area sensor 39a (also referred to as "first emission detecting means" or "first emission detecting sensor") for detecting the ejection of a game ball entering the second large winning opening 35 The detection sensor 49a (also referred to as "second emission detection means" or "second emission detection sensor") is generally also referred to as "emission detection means" or "emission detection sensor".

In this embodiment, the control program of the main control unit 80 counts the number of balls entered and the number of ejected game balls related to the second major winning opening 35, and the number of entered balls and the number of ejected balls match based on the counting result. By determining the discrepancy, it is possible to monitor the presence or absence of abnormalities, fraud, etc. related to the entry of the ball into the second large winning device 36 (second large winning opening 35) having the specific area 39. .. Inside the second grand prize device 36 (second grand prize opening 35), in order to operate the movable piece 150 for opening and closing the specific area 39, a game ball bites into the movable piece 150, and the second grand prize is won. There is a risk that the game ball will be clogged in the device 36 (second prize opening 35). When such ball clogging occurs, the number of balls entered and the number of ejected balls do not match because the game balls that have entered the second large winning opening 35 are not ejected thereafter. By monitoring the number of balls entered and the number of balls discharged in this way, it is possible to confirm the presence or absence of ball clogging. In addition, even when the game ball is detected by the specific area sensor 39a due to fraudulent activity such as so-called thread hanging goto, the number of balls entered and the number of ejected balls do not match, so the presence or absence of fraudulent activity is monitored based on this. , It is also possible to prevent unexpected damage from occurring.

Further, in the present embodiment, it is possible to determine the occurrence of an error related to the passage of the game ball to the specific area 39 by the control program of the main control unit 80. Specifically, the specific area valid period for treating the detection of the game ball by the specific area sensor 39a as valid is set when the operation of the movable piece 150 starts, and the period excluding the specific area valid period (specific area). When the game ball is detected by the specific area sensor 39a (when detected by the specific area sensor 39a) during the period other than the valid period), it is determined that an error has occurred and the detection is treated as invalid. It is supposed to be. Further, even when an abnormality occurs in the signal (specific area passing signal) of the specific area sensor 39a due to a poor connection or the like, it is possible to generate an error. It is also possible to monitor the presence or absence of fraudulent activity, equipment failure, damage, etc. by determining an error based on the specific area validity period or the connection failure of the specific area sensor 39a, which causes unexpected damage. It is possible to prevent this from happening.

A gate 28 (game ball passage port) through which the game ball can pass is provided in the area on the right side of the center decoration body 10 in the game area 3. Based on the passage of the game ball to the gate 28, a random number for determining whether or not the normal symbol is correct is acquired, and when a predetermined predetermined condition is satisfied, it is determined whether or not to open the second starting port 21. As the symbol winning / failing determination is executed, the normal symbol is displayed in a variable manner, and is stopped and displayed based on the result of the normal symbol winning / failing determination. When the normal symbol is stopped and displayed, the second starting port 21 is opened.

Further, a plurality of general winning openings 27 are provided in the lower part of the game area 3. In this embodiment, four general winning openings 27 are provided, three of which are left general winning openings provided on the left side of the first starting opening 20, and one is right of the first large winning opening 30. It is the right general winning opening provided on the side. The first starting port 20, the second starting port 21, the first large winning opening 30, the second large winning opening 35, and the general winning opening 27 are the entry ports that trigger the payout of the winning balls, and each entry opening. When a game ball enters the ball, a predetermined number of game balls (also referred to as "prize balls") are paid out at each entry port. Specifically, the number of prize balls in the first starting port 20 is "4", the number of prize balls in the second starting port 21 is "1", the number of prize balls in the general winning opening 27 is "10", and the first big prize. The number of prize balls in the mouth 20 and the second prize opening 35 is "15".

In this way, a game in which a plurality of ball entrances (first starting opening 20, second starting opening 21, first large winning opening 30, second large winning opening 35, general winning opening 27, and gate 28) are arranged. The area 3 can be divided into a left game area 3A (first area) on the left side of the center in the left-right direction and a right game area 3B (second area) on the right side. Launching a game ball so that the game ball flows down in the left game area 3A is called "left-handed", and launching the game ball so that the game ball flows down in the right game area 3B is called "right-handed". ..

Of the plurality of entry ports, the first start opening 20 and the three left general winning openings 27 are provided so that a game ball flowing down the left game area 3A of the game area 3 can enter. The second starting opening 21, the first large winning opening 30, the second large winning opening 35, the right general winning opening 27, and the gate 28 allow a game ball flowing down the right game area 3B of the game area 3 to enter. It is provided as follows. In this pachinko gaming machine 1, at the start of the game, in principle, the player aims to enter the first starting port 20 by hitting left. On the other hand, when the game state changes due to a hit in the hit / fail judgment based on the entry into the first starting opening 20, in principle, the gate 28, the second starting opening 21, the first big winning opening 30 and the first winning opening 20 are hit right. The aim is to enter the two major winning openings 35.

Further, as shown in FIGS. 3 and 4, the main display 40 is arranged outside the game area 3 (outside the game area) and at the lower right of the game board 2. The main display 40 includes a first special symbol display 41a (first special symbol display unit) for variable display and stop display of the first special symbol, and a second special symbol for variable display and stop display of the second special symbol. A display 41b (second special symbol display unit) and a normal symbol display 42 (ordinary symbol display unit) that displays a variable display and a stop display of a normal symbol are included.

Further, the main display 40 includes a first special symbol hold indicator 43a for displaying the number of stored numbers of the hit / fail determination information (first special symbol hold) related to the first special symbol, and a hit / fail determination information related to the second special symbol (first special symbol hold) The second special figure hold indicator 43b that displays the stored number of the second special figure hold) and the normal figure hold indicator 44 that displays the stored number of the operation hold (normal figure hold) of the normal symbol display 42 are included.

Further, the main display 40 includes a round display 45 indicating the number of rounds of the big hit game to be executed when the result of the first special symbol hit / fail judgment or the second special symbol hit / fail judgment is a big hit (specific result). , The game state indicator 46 indicating that the probability fluctuation function is activated, the launch direction indicator 47 indicating the launch direction of the game ball (whether it should be left-handed or right-handed), and the first special symbol hit / fail A hit indicator 48, which indicates that the result of the determination or the second special symbol hit / fail determination is a big hit, is included.

The various indicators included in the main indicator 40 are displayed and controlled by the main control unit described later. In the following description, the first special symbol and the second special symbol may be collectively referred to as a special symbol, and the first special symbol display 41a and the second special symbol display 41b are collectively referred to as a special symbol display unit. Therefore, the first special figure holding display 43a and the second special figure holding display 43b may be collectively referred to as a special figure holding display unit.

In the special symbol display unit, the special symbol (identification information) is displayed in a variable manner for a predetermined time and then stopped, and the special symbol (stop symbol) that is stopped and displayed is used to enter the first starting port 20 or the second starting port 21. Notify the result of the lottery (special symbol winning / failing judgment, big hit lottery). The special symbol that is stopped and displayed is one special symbol selected from a plurality of types of special symbols by the judgment of whether or not the special symbol is correct. When the stop symbol is a predetermined special special symbol (specific identification information), that is, when it is a hit symbol such as a big hit symbol or a small hit symbol, an open pattern corresponding to the type of the specific special symbol displayed as stopped is displayed. A special game (big hit game) for opening the first big winning opening 30 or the second big winning opening 35 is executed. The opening pattern of the large winning openings (1st major winning opening 30 and 2nd major winning opening 35) in the special game will be described later.

As shown in FIG. 4, the first special symbol display 41a is composed of eight LEDs indicated by "ip", and displays a special symbol according to the result of the first special symbol hit / miss determination. In this embodiment, as a result of the first special symbol hit / fail determination, seven types of big hits of "7R 1st to 7th big hits" are provided (see FIG. 8). The LED of the first special symbol display 41a can take a display mode (also referred to as a "specific mode" or a "specific display result") corresponding to each of the seven types of jackpots.

Specifically, when the result of the first special symbol hit / fail judgment is "7R first jackpot", the three LEDs of "ijn" are turned on and the rest are turned off (7R first jackpot symbol). In the case of "7R 2nd jackpot", the 3 LEDs of "imn" are turned on and the rest are turned off (7R 2nd jackpot symbol), and in the case of "7R 3rd jackpot", 3 of "jln" It is assumed that the LED is turned on and the rest is turned off (7R 3rd big hit symbol), and in the case of "7R 4th big hit", the 3 LEDs of "jkn" are turned on and the rest are turned off (7R 4th). (Big hit design), in the case of "7R 5th big hit", the 3 LEDs of "kln" shall be turned on and the rest shall be turned off (7R 5th big hit design), and in the case of "7R 6th big hit", "klp" 3 LEDs of "" are turned on and the rest are turned off (7R 6th big hit symbol), and in the case of "7R 7th big hit", 3 LEDs of "kln" are turned on and the rest are turned off. (7R 7th jackpot symbol). Further, when the result of the first special symbol hit / fail determination is "off", one LED of "n" is turned on and the rest is turned off (off symbol, non-specific mode).

On the other hand, the second special symbol display 41b is composed of eight LEDs indicated by "a to h", and displays a special symbol according to the result of the second special symbol hit / fail determination. In this embodiment, two types of jackpots, "15R 8th jackpot" and "15R 9th jackpot", are provided as a result of the second special symbol winning / failing determination (see FIG. 8). The LED of the second special symbol display 41b can take a display mode (also referred to as a "specific mode" or a "specific display result") corresponding to each of the two types of jackpots.

Specifically, when the result of the second special symbol hit / fail judgment is "15R 8th jackpot", the four LEDs of "acde" are turned on and the rest are turned off (15R 8th jackpot symbol). In the case of "15R 9th jackpot", it is assumed that the four LEDs of "bfgh" are turned on and the rest are turned off (15R 9th jackpot symbol). Further, when the result of the second special symbol winning / failing determination is "off", one LED of "g" is turned on and the rest is turned off (off symbol, non-specific mode).

The stop display mode (stop symbol) and the type of jackpot (type of number of rounds, number of jackpots, etc.) of the special symbol are not limited to this embodiment, and can be set arbitrarily.

Before the special symbol is stopped and displayed, the special symbol is variablely displayed for a predetermined fluctuation time. The variation display of the special symbol may be such that each LED is turned on so that light repeatedly flows in a predetermined order, such as a clockwise direction or a counterclockwise direction. Further, the stop display mode of the first special symbol stopped and displayed on the first special symbol display 41a is maintained until the next variable display of the first special symbol is started. Similarly, the stop display mode of the second special symbol stopped and displayed on the second special symbol display 41b is maintained until the next variable display of the second special symbol is started.

The stop display (maintenance of the stop display mode) of the special symbol is performed until a predetermined stop display time (also referred to as “stop display period”) elapses. The stop display time can be, for example, any time of 1.0 seconds or less (for example, "0.6 seconds (600 ms)"). In this embodiment, it is based on the stop display time of the special symbol based on the result of the special symbol winning / failing judgment (also referred to as "missing stop display time") and the result of the special symbol winning / failing judgment being a big hit. The stop display time of the special symbol (also referred to as the "big hit stop display time") is the same time. The off-stop display time and the jackpot stop display time may be different.

If the special symbol displayed as stopped is an out-of-line symbol (non-specific mode) and the special symbol hold is stored at the time of the stop display, the stop display period (out-of-stop display time) of the out-of-line symbol is After that, the oldest (earliest) special symbol hold in the memory order is exhausted, and the variable display of the next special symbol is started. In addition, if the special symbol displayed as stopped is an out-of-line symbol and the special symbol hold is not stored at the time of the stop display, after the stop display period (out-of-stop display time) of the out-of-order symbol has elapsed. However, the stop display state of the special symbol is maintained. On the other hand, when the special symbol displayed as stopped is a jackpot symbol (specific mode), when the stop display period (big hit stop display time) of the jackpot symbol elapses, the game shifts to the opening period of the jackpot game described later. After the opening period, the first round of the jackpot game is started. The round is also referred to as a "round game" or a "unit open game". Also, the round may be simply referred to as "R".

In the pachinko gaming machine 1, when a game ball enters the first starting port 20 or the second starting port 21, various information (“acquisition information”” such as a random number for determining whether or not a special symbol is correct is based on the ball entering. (Also referred to as) is acquired, and the acquired various information is temporarily stored in the special figure holding storage unit (not shown) formed in the RAM of the main control unit. Specifically, if the ball enters the first start port 20, it is stored in the first special figure hold storage unit (not shown) as the first special figure hold, and if the ball enters the second start port 21, it is stored. It is stored in the second special figure holding storage unit (not shown) as the second special figure holding. An upper limit is set for the number of special figure reservations that can be stored in each special figure reservation storage unit, and the upper limit value in this embodiment is "4", respectively. The first special figure holding storage unit and the second special figure holding storage unit are also referred to as "first acquired information storage means" and "second acquired information storage means", respectively, and are also generally referred to as "acquired information storage means".

The special figure hold stored in the special figure hold storage unit is digested when the variable display of the special symbol based on the special figure hold becomes possible. The digestion of the special symbol hold means to determine a random number for determining whether the special symbol is correct or not corresponding to the special symbol hold, and to execute a variable display (variable game) of the special symbol to show the determination result. Therefore, in the pachinko gaming machine 1, when the variation display of the special symbol based on the entry of the game ball into the first start port 20 or the second start port 21 cannot be immediately executed at the time of the entry, that is, the variation of the special symbol. Even when the display (variable game) is being executed or the special game is being executed, the right to determine whether or not the special symbol is correct for the incoming ball can be reserved up to a predetermined number.

The number of special figure hold stored in the special figure hold storage unit is displayed on the first special figure hold indicator 43a and the second special figure hold indicator 43b. Specifically, the first special figure hold indicator 43a is composed of two LEDs of "uv", and by controlling the display of the LEDs according to the number of the first special figure hold, the first special figure is held. It is intended to display the number of holds. For example, when the number of holds is "0", both LEDs are turned off, such as "u □ v □" (for example, □: turn off, ●: turn on red, ▲: turn on green), and the number of holds is set. When is "1", the LED of "u" is turned off and the LED of "v" is turned on in red, such as "u □ v ●". When the number of hold is "2", "u ●" The display mode is such that the LED of "u" is turned on in red and the LED of "v" is turned off, such as "v □", and when the number of holds is "3", both LEDs are turned on, such as "u ● v ●". The display mode can be set to light up in red, and when the number of holds is "4 (upper limit number)", both LEDs can be turned on in green as in "u ▲ v ▲".

Further, the second special figure hold indicator 43b is composed of two LEDs of "wx", and by controlling the display of the LEDs according to the number of the second special figure hold, the number of the second special figure hold is increased. Is to be displayed. For example, when the number of holds is "0", both LEDs are turned off, such as "w □ x □" (for example, □: off, ●: red, ▲: green), and the number of holds “1” to “4” are also defined in the same manner as in the first special figure holding indicator 43a.

The variable display of the normal symbol is performed when the game ball passes through the gate 28. In the normal symbol display 42, the normal symbol is displayed in a variable time for a predetermined time and then stopped, and the stop-displayed normal symbol (stop symbol) notifies the result of the normal symbol hit / fail determination based on the passage of the game ball to the gate 28. To do. The normal symbol that is stopped and displayed is one normal symbol selected from a plurality of types of normal symbols by the judgment of whether or not the normal symbol is correct. When the stop-displayed normal symbol is a predetermined specific normal symbol (hit normal symbol), an auxiliary game is performed in which the second starting port 21 is opened in an opening pattern according to the current game state. The opening pattern of the second starting port 21 will be described later.

Specifically, as shown in FIG. 4, the normal symbol display 42 is composed of two LEDs of "st", and displays a normal symbol according to the result of the normal symbol hit / fail judgment depending on the lighting mode. is there. For example, when the determination result is a hit, the normal symbol is stopped and displayed when both LEDs are lit, such as "s ■ t ■" (for example, ■: lit, □: turned off). If the determination result is out of order, an out-of-order normal symbol in which only the LED of "t" is lit, such as "s □ t ■", is displayed. It should be noted that the off-normal symbol is not a specific ordinary symbol. Before the normal symbol is stopped and displayed, the fluctuation display of the normal symbol is executed for a predetermined fluctuation time. The mode of the fluctuation display is, for example, a mode in which both LEDs are alternately turned on and off. Is. Further, the stopped display mode of the normal symbol stopped and displayed on the normal symbol display 42 is maintained until the next variation display of the normal symbol is started.

In the pachinko gaming machine 1, when a game ball passes through the gate 28, various information (also referred to as “acquired information”) such as a random number for determining whether or not a normal symbol is correct is acquired based on the passage, and this is acquired. Various kinds of information are temporarily stored as a normal figure hold in a normal figure hold storage unit (not shown) formed in the RAM of the main control unit. An upper limit is set for the number of normal figure reservations that can be stored in the normal figure hold storage unit, and the upper limit value in this embodiment is "4". The normal figure hold stored in the normal figure hold storage unit is digested when the variable display of the normal symbol based on the normal figure hold becomes possible. The digestion of the normal symbol hold means to determine the random number for determining whether the normal symbol is correct or not corresponding to the normal symbol hold, and to execute the variable display of the ordinary symbol to show the determination result. Therefore, in the pachinko gaming machine 1, when the variation display of the normal symbol based on the passage of the game ball to the gate 28 cannot be executed immediately at the time of passing, that is, when the variation display of the normal symbol is being executed or the auxiliary game is being executed. Even so, it is possible to reserve the right to judge whether or not a normal symbol is correct for the passage of a predetermined number up to a predetermined number.

The number of the normal figure hold stored in the normal figure hold storage unit is displayed on the normal figure hold indicator 44. Specifically, the normal figure hold indicator 44 is composed of two LEDs of "qr", and displays the number of normal figure hold by turning on the LEDs according to the number of normal figure hold. is there. For example, when the number of holds is "0", both LEDs are turned off, such as "q □ r □" (for example, □: turn off, ●: turn on red, ▲: turn on green), and the number of holds is set. When is "1", the display mode can be such that the LED of "q" is turned off and the LED of "r" is turned on in red, such as "q □ r ●". Further, the number of holds "2" to "4" is also defined in the same manner as in the first special figure hold indicator 43a.

As shown in FIG. 4, the round display 45 is composed of two LEDs, a 7R lamp and a 15R lamp. In the round display 45, for example, when any of the 7R first to seventh jackpots is obtained, the 7R lamp is lit and displayed at the timing when the corresponding jackpot symbol is confirmed and displayed. Specifically, the display mode is as shown in "7R (15R) Δ" (for example, Δ: off, ▲: on). Further, when the 15R 8th jackpot or the 15R 9th jackpot is reached, the 15R lamp is lit and displayed at the timing when the corresponding jackpot symbol is confirmed and displayed. Specifically, the display mode is as shown in "7R Δ15R ▲" (for example, Δ: off, ▲: on).

As shown in FIG. 4, the hit indicator 48 is composed of three LEDs indicated by "b1 to b3", and the above-mentioned jackpot symbol (specific mode, specific display result) is displayed on the special symbol display unit. Occasionally, by turning on the LED in a predetermined manner in accordance with this, it is displayed (notified) that the result of the first special symbol hit / miss determination or the second special symbol hit / miss determination is a big hit. Specifically, for example, after the result of the first special symbol winning / failing determination becomes a big hit (specific result) and the variation display of the first special symbol based on this is performed on the first special symbol display 41a, the above-mentioned 7R When any of the 1st to 7th jackpot symbols is displayed (stopped display) on the 1st special symbol display 41a, "b1 ■ b2 ■ b3 □" (for example, ■: on, □: off). ), The LEDs of "b1" and "b2" are turned on, and the LED of "b3" is turned off. In addition, the result of the second special symbol hit / fail judgment becomes a jackpot (specific result), and after the variation display of the second special symbol based on this is performed on the second special symbol display 41b, the above-mentioned 15R 8th jackpot symbol or When the 15R 9th jackpot symbol is displayed (stopped) on the 2nd special symbol display 41b, it is displayed as "b1 ■ b2 □ b3 ■" (for example, ■: on, □: off). The LEDs of "b1" and "b3" are turned on, and the LEDs of "b2" are turned off.

In this way, the hit indicator 48 determines whether or not the special symbol hits the target when a jackpot occurs (when the jackpot symbol is displayed) depending on the lighting mode of the three LEDs "b1 to b3". However, it is possible to notify which of the first special symbol winning / failing determination and the second special symbol winning / failing determination is made. The notification of the type of special symbol winning / failing determination that triggered the big hit by the hit indicator 48 is also referred to as "judgment notification", and the hit indicator 48 is also referred to as "judgment notification means".

The determination notification by the hit indicator 48 is performed over a predetermined period from the occurrence of the big hit (display of the big hit symbol), and in this embodiment, from the occurrence of the big hit (display of the big hit symbol) to the occurrence of the next big hit. It will be held during (until the next jackpot symbol is displayed). For example, while advancing the game by hitting left (while the variable display of the first special symbol is being performed), the jackpot symbol is displayed (stop display) on the first special symbol display 41a, and then the jackpot game is followed by right-handed hitting. When the jackpot symbol is displayed on the second special symbol display 41b (stop display) while the game is being advanced in (while the second special symbol is being displayed in a variable manner), the jackpot symbol on the first special symbol display 41a is displayed. The display mode (lighting mode) of the hit indicator 48 becomes "b1 ■ b2 ■ b3 □" with the display of the above, and then the hit display is displayed until the jackpot symbol is displayed on the second special symbol display 41b. The display mode “b1 ■ b2 ■ b3 □” of the vessel 48 is maintained. Then, when the big hit symbol is displayed on the second special symbol display 41b, the two LEDs "b1" and "b2" of the hit display 48 that have been lit up to that point are turned off and "b2" is turned off to hit. The display mode (lighting mode) of the display 48 is "b1 ■ b2 □ b3 ■". Further, for example, when the jackpot symbol is displayed on the first special symbol display 41a, and then the jackpot symbol is displayed on the first special symbol display 41a again after the jackpot game, the first special symbol display 41a is used. The display mode (lighting mode) of the hit indicator 48 becomes "b1 ■ b2 ■ b3 □" triggered by the display of the previous jackpot symbol, and then the jackpot symbol related to the next jackpot is displayed on the first special symbol display 41a. Even after this, the display mode "b1 ■ b2 ■ b3 □" of the hit indicator 48 is maintained. Therefore, in this embodiment, between the "first (previous) big hit" and the "after (next) big hit" (big hit), the special symbol hit / fail judgment that triggered the first (previous) big hit is determined. It is possible to indicate (notify) the type.

The execution period (judgment notification period) of the determination notification by the hit indicator 48 does not have to extend to the big hit interval as in this embodiment. For example, from the occurrence of a big hit (display of a big hit symbol) to the end of the big hit game related to the big hit, or from the occurrence of a big hit (display of a big hit symbol) to the elapse of a predetermined time after the big hit game related to the big hit. , It is possible from the occurrence of the big hit (display of the big hit symbol) to the variable display of the special symbol after the big hit game related to the big hit is performed a predetermined number of times. Further, when the game state after the end of the big hit game becomes a game state (also referred to as "specific game state") that is more advantageous to the player than the normal game state such as a high probability state or a time saving state described later, it is determined. It is also possible to set the notification period from the occurrence of the big hit (display of the big hit symbol) to the end of the specific gaming state. Further, when a specific area abnormal passage described later occurs during the big hit game, it is possible to set a predetermined period from the occurrence of the specific area abnormal passage as the determination notification period. In this case, a display mode (lighting mode) indicating the type of special symbol hit / fail judgment (first special symbol hit / fail judgment or second special symbol hit / fail judgment) that triggered the big hit game being executed when the specific area abnormal passage occurs. ), The LED of the hit indicator 48 is turned on.

Further, in this embodiment, the display mode (initial display mode) of the hit indicator 48 when the power of the pachinko gaming machine 1 is turned on is, in principle, a mode in which all three LEDs of "b1 to b3" are turned off (all). It is turned off). Further, in this embodiment, the display by the hit indicator 48 (that is, “judgment notification”) is the target of backup. Therefore, for example, when the power is turned off while the display mode of the hit indicator 48 is “b1 ■ b2 ■ b3 □”, the LED lighting pattern data related to the display mode is stored (backed up) in the RAM. Then, when the power is turned on next time, the display mode of the hit indicator 48 is the same as before the power off occurrence, according to the backed up lighting pattern data. However, when the RAM is cleared when the power of the pachinko gaming machine 1 is turned on, the backed up lighting pattern data is erased, and the display mode of the hit indicator 48 is the above-mentioned initial display mode (all off). To. It should be noted that the determination notification by the hit indicator 48 may be configured not to be a backup target.

Next, the electrical configuration of the pachinko gaming machine 1 will be described with reference to FIGS. 2 and 5. The pachinko gaming machine 1 of the present embodiment is a main control board 80 (also referred to as a “main control unit”, “game control”) that controls game progress and game profits such as special symbol hit / miss judgment, normal symbol hit / miss judgment, and transition of game state. (Also referred to as a "unit"), a sub-control board 90 (also referred to as a "sub-control unit", a "sub-control unit", or a "effect control unit") that controls an effect to be executed as the game progresses, and a game ball. A payout control board 110 (also referred to as a “payout control unit”) that controls payout, an image display device 7, an effect display 102, an effect 1st special figure hold indicator 103a, an effect 2 special figure hold indicator 103b, etc. It includes an image control board 100 (also referred to as an "image control unit") that controls display.

Further, as shown in FIG. 2, a main control board storage case for storing the main control board 80 is provided in a substantially central portion on the rear surface side (back surface side) of the pachinko game machine 1, and above the main control board case. Is provided with a storage case for an image control board or the like that houses the voice control board 106, the lamp control board 107, and the image control board 100, and the sub-control board that stores the sub-control board 90 is stored on the storage case for the image control board or the like. A case is provided. Further, a payout control board case for accommodating the payout control board 110 is provided on the lower left side of the main control board case, and a power supply board case for accommodating the power supply board 109 is provided on the right side thereof.

The power supply board 109 functions as a power supply means for supplying power to the pachinko gaming machine 1 by receiving power supplied from the outside. Specifically, power is applied to various electric parts required for the operation of the pachinko gaming machine 1, such as various substrates, devices / devices, sensors, switches, motors, and solenoids shown in the block diagram of FIG. Supply. The power supply board 109 is provided with a power switch (not shown) in a state of being exposed to the outside of the power supply board case. When the power switch is turned on, power supply is started, and when the power switch is turned off, power is supplied. Supply is stopped.

A game control one-chip microcomputer (also referred to as a “game control microcomputer”) 81 that controls the progress of the game of the pachinko game machine 1 according to a program is mounted on the main control board 80. The game control microcomputer 81 includes a ROM that stores a program for controlling the progress of the game, a RAM that is used as a work memory, and a CPU that executes a program stored in the ROM. The game control microcomputer 81 transmits / receives data (information) to / from another board or the like via the input / output circuit 87 (I / O port unit). The input / output circuit 87 may be built in the game control microcomputer 81. Further, the ROM may be externally attached. The RAM of the game control microcomputer 81 is provided with the above-mentioned special figure holding storage unit (first special figure holding storage unit and second special figure holding storage unit) and the normal figure holding storage unit.

Various sensors and solenoids are connected to the main control board 80 via the relay board 88. Therefore, signals are input to the main control board 80 from each sensor, and signals are output to each solenoid from the main control board 80. Specifically, as the sensors, the first start port sensor 20a, the second start port sensor 21a, the gate sensor 28a, the first big winning opening sensor 30a, the second big winning opening sensor 35a, the specific area sensor 39a, non-specific The area sensor 49a and the general winning opening sensor 27a are connected. These various sensors are also referred to as "game ball detecting means".

The first start port sensor 20a is provided in the first start port 20 and detects a game ball that has entered the first start port 20. The second start port sensor 21a is provided in the second start port 21 and detects a game ball that has entered the second start port 21. The gate sensor 28a is provided in the gate 28 and detects a game ball that has passed through the gate 28. The first large winning opening sensor 30a is provided in the first large winning opening 30 and detects a game ball that has entered the first large winning opening 30. The second large winning opening sensor 35a is provided in the second large winning opening 35 and detects a game ball that has entered the second large winning opening 35. The specific area sensor 39a is provided in the specific area 39 in the second large winning opening 35, and detects the game ball that has passed through the specific area 39 among the game balls that have entered the second large winning opening 35. is there. The non-specific area sensor 49a is provided in the non-specific area 49 in the second large winning opening 35, and detects a game ball that has passed through the non-specific area 49 among the game balls that have entered the second large winning opening 35. Is what you do. The general winning opening sensor 27a is provided in each general winning opening 27 and detects a game ball that has entered the general winning opening 27. The RAM of the game control microcomputer 81 (main control unit 80) is provided with an area for counting and storing the number of game balls detected by each of these sensors (game ball detection means). By controlling (programming) the microcomputer 81, it is possible to count the number of detections by each sensor (counting means).

Further, as the solenoids, the second starting port solenoid 24, the first winning opening solenoid 33, the second winning opening solenoid 38, and the movable piece solenoid 151 are connected. These various solenoids are also called "electrical drive source" or "drive means". The second starting port solenoid 24 is for driving the opening / closing member 23 of the variable winning device 22, and the first winning opening solenoid 33 is for driving the opening / closing member 32 of the first winning device 31. is there. The second prize-winning port solenoid 38 is for driving the opening / closing member 37 of the second prize-winning device 36, and the movable piece solenoid 151 is for driving the movable piece 150 of the second prize-winning device 36. is there. Further, the main control board 80 includes a first special symbol display 41a, a second special symbol display 41b, a normal symbol display 42, a first special symbol hold indicator 43a, a second special symbol hold indicator 43b, and a general drawing. The hold indicator 44, the round indicator 45, the game status indicator 46, the launch direction indicator 47, and the hit indicator 48 are connected. The display control of the main display 40 including each of these displays is performed by the game control microcomputer 81.

Further, the main control board 80 transmits various commands to the payout control board 110 and receives signals from the payout control board 110 for payout monitoring. The payout control board 110 is stored in a payout device 120 for paying out prize balls and rental balls, and a card unit 135 (a prepaid card (game value storage medium) installed adjacent to the pachinko gaming machine 1 and inserted). (A device that enables ball lending based on the information provided) is connected, and the launch device 112 is connected via a launch control board 111 (also referred to as a “launch control unit”). The launcher 112 includes a launch handle 60 (see FIG. 1).

The payout control board 110 is mounted with a payout control one-chip microcomputer (also referred to as a “payout control microcomputer”) 116 that controls payout of game balls of the pachinko gaming machine 1 according to a program. The payout control microcomputer 116 includes a ROM that stores a program for controlling the payout of game balls, a RAM that is used as a work memory, and a CPU that executes a program stored in the ROM. The payout control microcomputer 116 uses the payout motor 121 of the payout device 120 based on the signal from the game control microcomputer 81 and the signal from the card unit 135 connected to the pachinko game machine 1 via the input / output circuit 117. It drives and pays out prize balls and pays out rental balls. The game balls to be paid out are detected by the payout sensors 122 and 123 for counting. When the player operates the handle 60 of the launcher 112 (see FIG. 1), the touch sensor 114 detects the player's contact with the launch handle 60, and the launch volume 115 rotates the launch handle 60. Detect the amount. Then, the launch motor 113 is driven and controlled so that the game ball is launched with a strength corresponding to the magnitude of the detection signal of the launch volume 115.

Further, the main control board 80 transmits various commands to the sub control board 90. The connection between the main control board 80 and the sub control board 90 is a unidirectional communication connection capable of only transmitting a signal from the main control board 80 to the sub control board 90. That is, a unidirectional circuit (for example, a circuit using a diode) (not shown) as a communication direction regulating means is interposed between the main control board 80 and the sub control board 90.

Further, as shown in FIG. 5, the sub-control board 90 is mounted with a production control one-chip microcomputer (also referred to as “effect control microcomputer”) 91 that controls the production of the pachinko gaming machine 1 according to a program. .. The effect control microcomputer 91 includes a ROM that stores a program for controlling the game effect as the game progresses, a RAM that is used as a work memory, and a CPU that executes a program stored in the ROM. There is. The effect control microcomputer 91 transmits / receives data to / from another board or the like via the input / output circuit 95. The input / output circuit 95 may be built in the effect control microcomputer 91. Further, the ROM may be externally attached.

The image control board 100, the voice control board 106, and the lamp control board 107 are connected to the sub control board 90. The sub-control board 90 (sub-control unit), the image control board 100 (image control unit), the sound control board 106 (sound control unit), and the lamp control board 107 (lamp control unit) are displayed according to the game situation. As an effect control means (also referred to as "effect execution means") that controls various effects such as an effect, a sound effect, and a lamp effect (light effect) to be executed by a corresponding device or member (effect means) for the effect. It works.

The effect control microcomputer 91 (effect control means) of the sub-control board 90 can control the effect based on the result of the special symbol winning / failing determination executed under the control of the main control unit, and receives from the main control board 80. Based on the command, the CPU of the image control one-chip microcomputer 101 (also referred to as "image control microcomputer") of the image control board 100, the image display device 7, the effect display 102, and the effect 1 special figure hold display The display control of 103a and the effect second hold display 103b is performed. The RAM of the image control board 100 is a memory for developing image data. The ROM of the image control board 100 contains still image data and moving image data displayed on the image display device 7, specifically, characters, items, figures, characters, numbers, symbols, etc. (including effect symbols, hold symbols, etc.). And image data such as background images are stored. The image control microcomputer 101 reads image data from the ROM based on a command from the effect control microcomputer 91. Then, the display control is executed based on the read image data.

The effect display 102 includes two LEDs, and performs variable display and stop display in accordance with the variable display and stop display of the effect symbol 8. The variation display on the effect display 102 is performed by blinking the two LEDs. Then, by turning on / off the two LEDs or combining colors, the display is stopped and displayed in a display mode showing the display result of the effect symbol 8 (result of the special symbol hit / miss determination). Further, the effect 1 special figure hold indicator 103a and the effect 2 hold indicator 103b also include two LEDs in the same manner. Then, the effect 1st special figure hold indicator 103a and the number of hold items displayed on the 1st effect hold display area 9c and the 1st special figure hold indicator 43a by turning on / off the two LEDs or combining colors. The display is controlled in a display mode showing the same number of reserved pieces. Similarly, the effect 2nd special figure hold indicator 103b is displayed on the 2nd effect hold display area 9d and the 2nd special figure hold indicator 43b by turning on / off the two LEDs or by combining colors. The display is controlled in a display mode indicating the same number of reserved items as. This is to display the effect display on substantially the entire display screen 7a (effect symbol display unit), or to operate the movable decorative member 14 to display the effect display on the display screen 7a substantially as a whole of the effect symbol display area 7b (effect symbol display unit). By covering the image, some or all of the various images displayed on the display screen 7a, such as the effect symbol 8, the first effect hold 9a, and the second effect hold 9b, may become invisible. Such hold indicators 103a and 103b are provided. A VDP (Video Display Processor) may be provided in place of or in addition to the image control one-chip microcomputer 101 of the image control board 100.

Further, the effect control microcomputer 91 outputs voice, music, sound effects, and the like from the speaker 67 via the voice control board 106 based on the command received from the main control board 80. Acoustic data such as voice output from the speaker 67 is stored in the ROM of the sub-control board 90. A CPU may be mounted on the voice control board 106, and in that case, the CPU may execute voice control. Further, in this case, the ROM may be mounted on the voice control board 106, or the acoustic data may be stored in the ROM. Further, the speaker 67 may be connected to the image control board 100, and the CPU of the image control board 100 may execute voice control. Further, in this case, the acoustic data may be stored in the ROM of the image control board 100.

Further, the effect control microcomputer 91 determines the light emission pattern data (data for determining lighting / extinguishing, light emitting color, etc.) of lamps such as the frame lamp 66 and the board lamp 5 based on the command received from the main control board 80. The lamp data) is determined from the data stored in the ROM, and the lighting of the lamps (LEDs) such as the frame lamp 66 and the board lamp 5 is controlled via the lamp control board 107.

Further, the effect control microcomputer 91 operates the movable decorative member 14 connected to the lamp control board 107 via the relay board 108 based on the command received from the main control board 80. As described above, the movable decorative member 14 is a movable so-called gimmick provided in the center decorative body 10. The effect control microcomputer 91 determines operation pattern data (also referred to as “drive data”) for operating the movable decorative member 14 in a predetermined operation mode from the data stored in the ROM of the sub-control board 90. , The operation of the movable decorative member 14 is controlled based on the determined operation pattern data. A CPU may be mounted on the lamp control board 107, and in that case, the CPU may execute lamp lighting control or operation control of the movable decorative member 14. Further, in this case, the ROM may be mounted on the lamp control board 107, and the data related to the light emission pattern and the operation pattern may be stored in the ROM.

Further, the sub-control board 90 has a first effect button detection switch 63c and a first effect button detection switch 63c that detect that the first effect button 63a or the second effect button 63b (see FIG. 1) has been operated (pushed, rotated, pulled, etc.). 2 The effect button detection switch 63d is connected. Therefore, when the player performs a predetermined input operation on the first effect button 63a or the second effect button 63b, a signal is output from the corresponding effect button detection switch to the sub-control board 90. The first effect button detection switch 63c and the second effect button detection switch 63d are also collectively referred to as simply “effect button detection switch”.

Next, the control related to the hit / fail determination in the pachinko gaming machine 1 of this embodiment will be described. In this embodiment, there are "big hit" (specific result) and "missing" (non-specific result) as the result of the special symbol hit / fail judgment. When it is a "big hit", the "big hit symbol" is stopped and displayed on the special symbol display unit, and when it is "off", the "missing symbol" is stopped and displayed on the special symbol display unit. If it is determined to be a big hit, a "special game" is executed in which the first big winning opening 30 or the second big winning opening 35 is opened according to the opening pattern according to the type of the special symbol displayed as stopped. The special game is a game in which a game ball is inserted into the first large winning opening 30 or the second large winning opening 35 (special entry opening) that is opened in a predetermined opening pattern. A special game that is executed as a big hit is also called a "big hit game".

There are multiple types of jackpots. As shown in FIG. 6, the types of jackpots include "7R (round) 1st jackpot", "7R 2nd jackpot", "7R 3rd jackpot", "7R 4th jackpot", "7R 5th jackpot", There are a total of nine types, "7R 6th jackpot", "7R 7th jackpot", "15R 8th jackpot" and "15R 9th jackpot". The 7R 1st to 7th jackpots are jackpots in which the number of times (the number of rounds) of opening the jackpot (1st jackpot 30 or 2nd jackpot 35) is 7 times, and the 15R 8th and 9th jackpots are , The number of times (number of rounds) of opening of the big winning opening (first big winning opening 30 or second big winning opening 35) is 15 big hits.

Here, the 7R 1st to 7th jackpots are generally referred to as "7R jackpots", and the 15R 8th and 9th jackpots are also collectively referred to as "15R jackpots". Further, the jackpot game related to the 7R jackpot is also referred to as "7R jackpot game", and the jackpot game related to the 15R jackpot is also referred to as "15R jackpot game".

In this embodiment, there are two types of jackpots depending on the number of rounds, 7R jackpot and 15R jackpot. For example, two types of 5R jackpot and 10R jackpot, one type of 7R jackpot, etc. , Various jackpot types can be provided, and three or more types (for example, three types of 5R jackpot, 7R jackpot, and 10R jackpot) can be provided. Further, in this embodiment, the maximum number of rounds of the jackpot game is 15R (15R jackpot), but the maximum number of rounds is not limited to this, and for example, it may be less than 15R (for example, 10R).

In each round of the jackpot game related to the jackpot of this embodiment, one of the first jackpot 30 and the second jackpot 35 is open (ball-entry state, game ball-acceptable state), and the other It becomes a closed state (a state in which the ball cannot be entered, a state in which the game ball cannot be accepted). That is, the two large winning openings 30 and 35 (special entry openings) are not opened at the same time, and one of the large winning openings (special entry openings) is opened. Specifically, in the first round, the first big winning opening 30 (lower big winning opening) is closed and the second big winning opening 35 (upper big winning opening) is opened, and in the second round, the first big winning opening 30 (lower big prize opening) opens and the second big winning opening 35 (upper big winning opening) closes, and in the third round, the first big winning opening 30 (lower big winning opening) opens like the first round. Closed and the 2nd big winning opening 35 (upper big winning opening) opens, and in the 4th round, the 1st big winning opening 30 (lower big winning opening) opens like the 2nd round and the 2nd big winning opening 35 (upper prize opening) will be closed. After that, every time the 5th and 6th rounds progress, the 1st big winning opening 30 (lower big winning opening) is closed, the 2nd big winning opening 35 (upper big winning opening) is opened, and the 1st big winning opening. The opening of the winning opening 30 (lower large winning opening) and the closing of the second major winning opening 35 (upper large winning opening) occur alternately. That is, in the big hit game of this embodiment, the second big winning opening 35 (upper big winning opening) is opened in the odd round, and the first big winning opening 30 (lower big winning opening) is opened in the even round. The 1st big winning opening 30 (lower big winning opening) and the 2nd big winning opening 35 (upper big winning opening) alternate with the opening of the 2nd big winning opening 35 (upper big winning opening) first. Open.

Here, the big winning opening opening pattern during the big hit game will be described. In this embodiment, the opening patterns of the first special winning opening 30 and the second large winning opening 35 are the same. That is, in the odd round during the big hit game, the second big winning opening 35 is opened until 25,000 ms (25 seconds) elapses from the start of the round, and is closed after 25,000 ms (25 seconds) elapses to end the round. That is, the second large winning opening 35 is opened in an opening pattern with an opening time of 25,000 ms and an opening number of once. A game ball can be easily entered into the second large winning opening 35, which is opened in this opening pattern, by hitting right. On the other hand, in the even-numbered round during the big hit game, the first big winning opening 30 is opened until 25,000 ms (25 seconds) elapses from the start of the round, and then closed after 25,000 ms (25 seconds) to end the round. .. That is, the first large winning opening 30 is opened in an opening pattern with an opening time of 25,000 ms and an opening number of once. A game ball can be easily entered into the first large winning opening 30 which is opened by this opening pattern by hitting right.

Further, in the fifth round during the big hit game, in addition to opening the second big winning opening 35, the movable piece 150 is based on the number of game balls entering the second big winning opening 35 becoming a predetermined number. Is supposed to work. Specifically, when a game ball enters the second large winning opening 35, the entered game ball is detected by the second large winning opening sensor 35a, and the number of detected game balls (that is, the second large winning opening 35a). The number of balls entered into the large winning opening 35) is counted by a number of balls entered counting means (not shown) provided in the RAM of the main control unit 80. When the counting value by the ball entry number counting means reaches a predetermined value, the movable piece 150 operates on this occasion. That is, the operation timing of the movable piece 150 is defined by a predetermined value (the number of balls entered into the second large winning opening 35).

The predetermined value (counting value) that triggers the operation of the movable piece 150 is set within the range of the number of game balls (specified number) that are allowed to enter the second large winning opening 35 during one round. In this embodiment, there are roughly two predetermined values, a "first predetermined value (first count value)" and a "second predetermined value (second count value)" which is a value larger than the first predetermined value. Is provided.

Specifically, as shown in FIG. 48, the correspondence between the "big hit type" and the "first predetermined value and the second predetermined value" is stored in advance in the ROM of the main control unit 80 (value storage means). ). In this embodiment, the first predetermined value (first count value) is set to "1", and the second predetermined value (second count value) is set to "2". The first predetermined value is set for all jackpot types. On the other hand, the second predetermined value is set for a specific jackpot type (7R first, third, fifth, seventh jackpot and 15R eighth jackpot in this example), and other than that. The jackpot type (7R 2nd, 4th, 6th jackpot and 15R 9th jackpot in this example) is not set. Therefore, in this embodiment, the movable piece 150 operates at least once in the fifth round of the jackpot game, and can operate at most twice.

The setting modes of the first predetermined value and the second predetermined value shown in FIG. 48 are merely examples, and various other modes can be adopted. Further, in this embodiment, "2" is set as the second predetermined value, but the second predetermined value should be a value of "3" or more (for example, any of "3" to "9"). Is also possible. Further, the second predetermined value may be set to a different value depending on the jackpot type, for example, the 7R first jackpot is "2" and the 7R third jackpot is "3".

In this embodiment, as the operation mode (operation pattern) when the movable piece 150 operates, two types of modes in which the possibility of passing the game ball to the specific area 39 are relatively different are provided in advance. That is, there are two modes: a mode in which the game ball has a low possibility of passing through the specific area 39 (first operation mode) and a mode in which the game ball has a high possibility of passing through the specific area 39 (second operation mode). It is provided, and when the movable piece 150 operates, it operates in any mode. The mode in which the movable piece 150 is operated is determined by the above-mentioned predetermined value that triggered the operation when the movable piece 150 is operated, that is, the counting value by the number of winning balls counting means (second large winning opening sensor 35a). It is determined by the number of detected game balls by, that is, the number of balls entered into the second major winning opening 35).

Specifically, when the count value (the number of balls entered into the second large winning opening 35) becomes the first predetermined value (“1” in this example) and the movable piece 150 operates, the movable piece 150 is in a specific area. It operates in a mode in which the possibility of the game ball passing through the 39 is low (first operation mode), and the count value (the number of balls entered in the second large winning opening 35) is the second predetermined value (“2” in this example). When the movable piece 150 operates, the movable piece 150 operates in a mode in which the game ball has a high possibility of passing through the specific area 39 (second operation mode). When the movable piece 150 operates in the first motion mode, the possibility that the game ball passes through the specific area 39 is extremely low, and it becomes difficult (substantially impossible) for the game ball to pass through the specific area 39. .. On the other hand, when the movable piece 150 operates in the second operation mode, the possibility that the game ball passes through the specific area 39 is high, and the game ball easily passes through the specific area 39.

As described above, the second predetermined value is set for a specific jackpot type and is not set for other jackpot types. Therefore, the five types of jackpots corresponding to the specific jackpot type for which the second predetermined value is set, that is, the 7R first, third, fifth, fifth, and seventh jackpots and the 15R eighth jackpot are assigned to the specific area 39. It is a big hit (also referred to as "V passing big hit") in which the movable piece 150 is operated in a manner in which the game ball has a high possibility of passing (see FIG. 48). On the other hand, the jackpot for which the second predetermined value is not set, that is, the 7R second, fourth, sixth jackpot and the 15R ninth jackpot operates the movable piece 150 in a manner in which the possibility of the game ball passing through the specific area 39 is low. It is a big hit (also referred to as "V non-passing planned big hit") (see FIG. 48). That is, the "V-passing planned jackpot" is a jackpot (probability variation jackpot) on the premise that a high probability state described later is generated (giving a privilege), and the "V non-passing scheduled jackpot" is a high-probability jackpot described later. It is a big hit (non-probability change big hit) on the premise that the probability state is not generated (the privilege is not given). The jackpot game (special game) related to the V non-passing jackpot is also called the "first special game", and the jackpot game (special game) related to the V passing jackpot is also called the "second special game". ..

Here, the relationship between the operation of the movable piece 150 and the game ball that has entered the second large winning opening 35 is as follows. As shown in FIG. 49, when the counting value by the above-mentioned ball entry number counting means reaches the first predetermined value (“1” in this example), the movable piece 150 is set to the operating state for 80 ms (the movable piece solenoid 151 is turned on). .. That is, when the first ball is detected in the second winning opening 35, the specific area 39 is opened (V open) for 80 ms (0.08 seconds). That is, the movable piece 150 is operated with an operation pattern of 80 ms of operation time (opening time) and one operation number of times (opening number of times). In this case, the movement of the movable piece 150 is performed only for a very short time (momentary) of 80 ms, so that the game ball (the first (first) ball entering the second large winning opening 35) that triggered the movement is performed. By the time the corresponding game ball) passes through the second large winning opening sensor 35a and reaches the arrangement portion of the movable piece 150, the operation of the movable piece 150 is completed (it is in a non-operating state). Very likely (see Figure 50 (a)). Therefore, the possibility that the game ball passes through the specific area 39 is extremely low.

On the other hand, when the counting value by the above-mentioned number of incoming balls counting means reaches the second predetermined value (“2” in this example), the movable piece 150 is set to the operating state for 3000 ms (the movable piece solenoid 151 is turned on) (FIG. 49). That is, when the second ball is detected in the second winning opening 35, the specific area 39 is in the open state (V open) for 3000 ms (3 seconds). That is, the movable piece 150 is operated with an operation pattern of an operation time (opening time) of 3000 ms and an operation number of times (opening number) of 1. In this case, since the movement of the movable piece 150 is performed in a relatively long time of 3000 ms, the game ball that triggered the movement (the game ball corresponding to the second entry into the second prize opening 35). ) Passes through the second prize opening sensor 35a and reaches the arrangement portion of the movable piece 150, it is highly possible that the operation of the movable piece 150 has not been completed (in the operating state). High (see Figure 50 (b)). Therefore, the possibility that the game ball passes through the specific area 39 is extremely high. If the movable piece 150 is in an operating state when the round game ends, the operation of the movable piece 150 also ends with the end of the round game.

In this way, the movable piece 150 operates in a short opening operation pattern (first operation mode) in which the specific area 39 is opened for an extremely short time (80 ms) when the count value by the ball entry counting means reaches the first predetermined value. Then, when the counting value by the ball entry number counting means becomes the second predetermined value, the operation is performed in the long opening operation pattern (second operation mode) in which the specific region 39 is opened for a longer time (3000 ms) than the short opening operation pattern. Then, in the "V non-passing planned jackpot", the movable piece 150 operates in the short opening operation pattern (first operation mode) in the fifth round, but then operates in the long opening operation pattern (second operation mode). However, in the "V-passing planned jackpot", the movable piece 150 can operate in the short opening operation pattern (first operation mode) and then in the long opening operation pattern (second operation mode) in the fifth round. It has become.

Therefore, in the "V non-passing big hit", even if the game ball enters the second big winning opening 35 in the fifth round, it is extremely unlikely that the game ball will pass through the specific area 39 during the round ( Since it is substantially zero), it is unlikely that the game state after the end of the big hit game will be in the high probability state described later, in other words, the big hit is likely to be in the normal state (low probability state) described later. It becomes. On the other hand, in the "V-passing jackpot", if two or more game balls enter the second big winning opening 35 in the fifth round, there is an extremely high possibility that the game balls will pass through the specific area 39 during the round. Since (approximately 100%), the game state after the end of the big hit game is a big hit with a high possibility of becoming a high probability state described later. As described above, in this embodiment, it is determined whether or not the fifth round of the jackpot game is set to the high probability state after the jackpot game is completed based on whether or not the game ball has passed to the specific area 39. It is a round. Such a V-round is also referred to as a "privilege determination game", a "specific round game", or a "specific round".

Here, the movable piece 150 is a member that guides (distributes) the game ball that has entered the V attacker (second prize opening 35) to the specific area 39 or the non-specific area 49, and is used as the game ball in the V attacker. It is something to be involved in. Therefore, the movable piece 150 is usually provided in a part such as the inside or the back side of the V attacker, which is difficult to understand at first glance around the game board 2 (game area 3) and the V attacker (Fig.). See 50). In addition, the opening patterns of the big winning openings (1st big winning opening 30 and 2nd big winning opening 35) during the big hit game of this embodiment are the V passing planned big hit and the V non-V for each of the 7R big hit and the 15R big hit. The opening time, the number of opening times, and the opening order are the same as the planned passing jackpot, and the opening pattern in the V round (fifth round in this example) is also the same (see FIG. 6). By controlling the movement of the movable piece 150 based on these things and the counting value (the number of balls entering the V attacker) by the ball entry counting means in the V round, for example, "When is the game ball entering the V attacker?" It may be difficult to determine the specific area passage status (V passage status) of the game ball in the V round, such as "whether the game ball can pass through the specific area 39" or "whether the game ball has passed the specific area 39". It will be possible.

As a result, according to the pachinko gaming machine 1 of the present embodiment, for example, even if the movement (opening pattern) of the V attacker is closely watched as in the conventional case, the result of the V round is discriminated (grassed, predicted) before its determination. Since it is difficult to do so, it is possible to eliminate the deterioration of the game interest due to the fact that the result of the V round (whether or not the game ball has passed through the specific area) can be determined (predicted) in advance.

The opening pattern of the large winning opening is not limited to this embodiment, and the opening pattern may be different between the first large winning opening 30 and the second large winning opening 35. Further, in this embodiment, the large winning opening opening pattern is the same except that the number of rounds differs depending on the type of big hit (7R or 15R), but the large winning opening opening pattern may be different depending on the type of big hit. .. Furthermore, the operation patterns of the movable piece 150 (first operation mode, second operation mode) are not limited to this embodiment.

The distribution probability of each jackpot in the hit / fail judgment of the first special symbol (special figure 1) is 5% for the 7R first jackpot, 15% for the 7R second jackpot, 12% for the 7R third jackpot, and 7R fourth jackpot. 15%, 7R 5th jackpot is 18%, 7R 6th jackpot is 10%, and 7R 7th jackpot is 25%. When these are divided into V-passing jackpots and V-non-passing jackpots, 60% (5% + 12% + 18% + 25% = 60%) and V-non-passing jackpots are 40% (15% + 15). % + 10% = 40%) (see FIGS. 6 and 8).

On the other hand, the distribution probability of each jackpot in the hit / fail judgment of the second special symbol (special figure 2) is 80% for the 15R 8th jackpot and 20% for the 15R 9th jackpot. When divided into the planned passing jackpots, the V scheduled passing jackpots are 80% and the V non-passing scheduled jackpots are 20% (see FIGS. 6 and 8).

For this reason, if a big hit is made in the hit / fail judgment of the second special symbol based on the ball entering the second starting port 21, which is facilitated by the operation of the opening extension function (generation of a high base state) described later. , The possibility of a big hit scheduled to pass through V is higher than that of a big hit in the hit / fail judgment of the first special symbol based on the entry of the ball into the first starting port 20. Further, if a big hit is obtained in the hit / fail judgment of the second special symbol based on the ball entering the second starting port 21, it occurs in the hit / fail judgment of the first special symbol based on the ball entering the first starting port 20. A 15R jackpot that cannot be obtained occurs.

In this way, in the pachinko gaming machine 1, the game ball is inserted into the second starting port 21 rather than being a big hit in the hit / fail judgment (first special symbol hit / fail judgment) performed by entering the game ball into the first starting port 20. It is set so that it is more likely that a big hit will be advantageous to the player in the hit / fail judgment (second special symbol hit / fail judgment) performed by entering the ball. Therefore, the player plays the game in anticipation of entering the second starting port 21. This is particularly remarkable during the operation of the open extension function in which the frequency of entering the second starting port 21 increases.

In this pachinko gaming machine 1, the special symbol hit / fail judgment (big hit judgment) is performed based on a random number for special symbol hit / fail judgment (also referred to as “win / fail judgment information”), and the type of big hit is determined when a big hit occurs. Is performed based on a random number for determining a jackpot type (also referred to as a "random number for determining a symbol" or "information for determining a symbol"). As shown in FIG. 7A, the random number for determining whether or not the special symbol is correct has a value in the range of "0 to 629", and the random number for determining the jackpot type has a value in the range of "0 to 99". In addition, the random numbers (acquired information) acquired based on the entry into the first starting port 20 and the second starting port 21 include a random number for determining whether the special symbol is correct or not, a random number for determining the jackpot type, and a variable pattern random number (acquired information). There is also "fluctuation pattern information").

The fluctuation pattern random number is a random number for determining a fluctuation pattern including a fluctuation time. The fluctuation pattern random number takes a value in the range of "0 to 198". Further, the random numbers acquired based on the passage of the gate 28 include the normal symbol hit / miss determination random numbers shown in FIG. 7 (B). The random number for determining whether or not the normal symbol is correct is a random number for determining whether or not to perform an auxiliary game for opening the second starting port 21 (ordinary symbol lottery). Ordinary symbol random numbers take a value in the range of "0 to 240".

Next, the gaming state of the pachinko gaming machine 1 of this embodiment will be described. The pachinko gaming machine 1 of the present embodiment sets the gaming state when the variable game is executed by operating each function of the probability variation function, the variation time shortening function (time reduction function), and the open extension function for the special symbol and the normal symbol. It is possible to control by a combination of non-operation. The game state when the variable game is executed can also be said to be a variable game mode (also referred to as “variable mode”).

For special symbols (first special symbol and second special symbol), the state in which the probability fluctuation function is operating is called a "high probability state", and the state in which the probability fluctuation function is not operating is called a "normal state" or a "low probability state". In the normal state, the hit / fail judgment is performed using the jackpot judgment table for the normal state, and in the high probability state, the value of the special symbol hit / fail judgment random number judged as the jackpot is larger than in the normal state for the high probability state. A hit / fail judgment is made using the jackpot judgment table (see FIG. 8 (A)). Therefore, in the high probability state, the probability of being judged as a big hit in the special symbol hit / fail judgment is higher than in the normal state. That is, when the probability fluctuation function of the special symbol is activated, the probability that the result of the variation display of the special symbol becomes a big hit (the stop symbol becomes a jackpot symbol) is higher than when it is not activated. ..

Further, for the special symbols (first special symbol and second special symbol), the state in which the fluctuation time shortening function (time saving function) is operating is called "time saving state", and the state in which it is not operating is called "non-time saving state". .. In the time-saving state, the average of the fluctuation time of the special symbol (the time from the start of the fluctuation display to the confirmation display) is shorter than the average of the fluctuation time of the special symbol in the non-time-saving state. That is, in the time saving state, the fluctuation pattern is determined using the fluctuation pattern table defined so that the fluctuation pattern having the short fluctuation time is selected more often than in the non-time saving state (see FIG. 9). .. As a result, in the time-saving state, the pace of digestion of the special figure hold becomes faster, and effective ball entry into the starting port (ball entry that can be stored as special figure hold) is likely to occur. Therefore, it is possible to aim for a big hit under the smooth progress of the game.

The probability fluctuation function and the fluctuation time shortening function for the special symbols (first special symbol and second special symbol) may be operated at the same time, or only one of them may be operated. In addition, the probability fluctuation function and the fluctuation time shortening function for the normal symbol operate in synchronization with the fluctuation time shortening function for the special symbol. That is, the probability fluctuation function and the fluctuation time shortening function of the normal symbol operate in the time saving state of the special symbol, and do not operate in the non-time saving state. Therefore, in the time-saving state, the hit probability in the normal symbol winning / failing determination is higher than in the non-time-saving state. Specifically, in the time saving state, the value of the normal symbol random number (winning random number) determined to be a hit is larger than the normal symbol hit judgment table used in the non-time saving state. Judgment of a normal symbol) is performed (see FIG. 8C). As a result, the time saving state (when the probability fluctuation function for the normal symbol is operating) is compared with the non-time saving state (when the probability fluctuation function for the normal symbol is not operating), and the fluctuation display of the normal symbol is performed. There is a high probability that the display result of will be a hit (the stop symbol will be a normal hit symbol).

Further, in the time saving state, the fluctuation time of the normal symbol is shorter than in the non-time saving state. In this embodiment, the fluctuation time of the normal symbol is set to 30 seconds in the non-time saving state and 1 second in the time saving state (see FIG. 8D). Further, in the time saving state, the opening time extension function of the variable winning device 22 (second starting port 21) is activated, and the opening time of the second starting port 21 in the auxiliary game is longer than in the non-time saving state. In addition, in the time saving state, the function of increasing the number of times the variable winning device 22 is opened is activated, and the number of times the second starting port 21 is opened in the auxiliary game is larger than in the non-time saving state. Specifically, when the result of the normal symbol winning / failing determination is successful in the non-time saving state, the opening / closing member 23 of the variable winning device 22 (second starting port 21) performs an opening operation for 0.2 seconds once, and the time saving state. When the result of the normal symbol winning / failing determination is successful, the opening / closing member 23 of the variable winning device 22 (second starting port 21) performs the opening operation for 2.0 seconds three times.

In the situation where the probability fluctuation function and the fluctuation time shortening function for the normal symbol, and the opening time extending function and the opening number increasing function of the variable winning device 22 are operating, compared with the case where these functions are not operating. Therefore, the second starting port 21 is frequently opened, and the frequency of entering the game ball into the second starting port 21 becomes high (this is also referred to as a “high frequency state”). As a result, the base, which is the ratio of the number of prize balls to the number of launched balls, becomes high. Therefore, the state in which these functions are operating is called a "high base state" or "electric support state", and the state in which these functions are not operating is called a "low base state". In the high base state (high frequency state), you can aim for a big hit without significantly reducing the number of game balls you have.

In the high base state, all the above-mentioned functions do not have to be activated. That is, as compared with the case where the function is not activated by the operation of at least one of the probability fluctuation function and the fluctuation time shortening function of the normal symbol, and the opening time extending function and the opening number increasing function of the variable winning device 22. It suffices if the second starting port 21 is easily opened (the frequency of entering the ball is high). Further, the high base state may be controlled independently without being accompanied by the time saving state of the special symbol. A function that generates such a high base state can also be called a "high base generation function".

In the pachinko gaming machine 1 of the present embodiment, the gaming state after the jackpot game when any of the 7R 1st, 3rd, 5th, 5th, and 7th jackpots and the 15R 8th jackpot (that is, the jackpot scheduled to pass V) is reached. Since there is an extremely high possibility that the game ball will pass through the specific area 39 during the jackpot game, the special symbol will be in a high probability state based on the passage of the game ball to the specific area 39, and the time reduction of the special symbol will be achieved. It becomes a state and a high base state (see FIG. 6). This gaming state is also called "high accuracy and high base state". The high-accuracy high-base state is the so-called "probability-changing game state". The pachinko gaming machine 1 of this embodiment is of a type in which a high-accuracy high-base state (high-probability state) is terminated by executing a variable display (variable game) of a special symbol a predetermined number of times (predetermined number of times). It is said to be a pachinko game machine (so-called "ST machine"). Therefore, in the high-probability and high-base state, when the variable display (variable game) of the special symbol is executed a predetermined number of times (for example, 150 times) without a big hit, the special symbol is in a low probability state and a non-time saving state. It becomes a low base state (see FIG. 6). This gaming state is also referred to as a "low probability low base state". It should be noted that the high accuracy and high base state ends even when the big hit game is executed in the high accuracy and high base state.

In addition, when any of the 7R 2nd, 4th, 6th big hits and the 15R 9th big hit (that is, the big hit scheduled to pass through V) is reached, the game state after the big hit game is that the game ball is in the big hit game. Since the possibility of passing through the specific region 39 is extremely low, the special symbol is in a low probability state, and the special symbol is in a time-saving state and a high base state (see FIG. 6). This gaming state is also referred to as a "low accuracy high base state". The low-accuracy high-based state is a so-called "time-saving game state" (also referred to as "time-saving game state"), in which a predetermined number of times (for example, 50 times, 75 times, or 100 times) of special symbol variation display (variable game) is displayed. It ends when it is executed or becomes a big hit and the big hit game is executed.

Although the possibility is extremely low, if the game ball does not pass through the specific area 39 during the jackpot game related to the jackpot scheduled to pass through V, the gaming state after the jackpot game becomes the "low accuracy high base state". .. Further, although the possibility is extremely low, when the game ball passes through the specific area 39 during the big hit game related to the big hit scheduled to pass V, the game state after the big hit game becomes the “high accuracy high base state”.

In a high base state such as a high accuracy high base state or a low accuracy high base state, it is more advantageous to allow the game ball to enter the right game area 3B by hitting the right side. In the high base state, the second starting port 21 is easier to open than in the low base state, and it is easier to enter the ball into the second starting port 21 than to enter the ball into the first starting port 20. Because. Therefore, while passing the game ball through the gate 28, which is a trigger for determining whether or not the symbol is correct, a right-handed hit is made to allow the game ball to enter the second starting port 21. As a result, a larger number of starting balls (opportunities for determining whether or not a special symbol is correct) can be obtained as compared with the case of hitting left. In this state, the launch direction indicator 47 is lit and controlled in a predetermined manner to notify that the game ball should be launched aiming at the right game area 3B (right-handed instruction notification).

On the other hand, in a low base state (for example, a low probability low base state), it is more advantageous to allow the game ball to enter the left game area 3A by hitting the left side. In the low base state, the second starting port 21 is less likely to be opened than in the high base state, and it is easier to enter the ball into the first starting port 20 than to enter the ball into the second starting port 21. Because. Therefore, a left-handed hit is made to allow the game ball to enter the first starting port 20. As a result, a larger number of starting balls (opportunities for determining whether or not a special symbol is correct) can be obtained as compared with the case of hitting right. In this state, the firing direction indicator 47 is lit (display controlled) in a predetermined mode to notify that the game ball should be launched aiming at the left game area 3A (left-handed instruction notification).

Specifically, the launch direction indicator 47 is composed of two LEDs of "yz", and indicates the launch direction by turning on the LEDs according to the game state. For example, in the low base state, it is possible to notify that the left game area should be fired as a display mode in which both LEDs are turned off, such as "y □ z □" (for example, □: off, ■: on). it can. In addition, in the high base state, it is possible to notify that the right game area should be fired as a display mode in which both LEDs are turned on, such as "y ■ z ■" (for example, □: off, ■: on). it can.

Further, in the present embodiment, only the LED display mode of the launch direction indicator 47 is used to provide an instruction notification instructing which of the left game area 3A and the right game area 3B of the game area 3 to fire the game ball. Instead, it is also performed by displaying the launch instruction image on the image display device 7 (display screen 7a). For the player, the image display device 7 (display screen 7a) is easier to visually recognize and understand the display contents than the launch direction display 47. Therefore, in general, the player should see the launch instruction image displayed on the image display device 7 (display screen 7a) and perform "left-handed" or "right-handed", that is, Recognize whether the current gaming state is the "left-handed gaming state" in which the player strikes left or the "right-handed gaming state" in which the player strikes right. The left-handed game state is a low-base state in which a variable game is executed, and a right-handed game state is a state in which a jackpot game is executed (special game state) and a high-base state in which a variable game is executed. The details of the instruction notification of the launch direction will be described later.

In this embodiment, when the game state (variable mode) is in the low base state, the game is advanced by hitting the left side, so that the first special symbol hit / miss judgment (first special symbol) based on the entry into the first starting port 20 Fluctuating game) is mainly executed. On the other hand, when the game state (variable mode) is in the high base state, the game is advanced by hitting right, so that the second special symbol hit / fail judgment based on the entry into the second starting port 21 (second special symbol variable game). Is mainly executed.

As described above, in the pachinko gaming machine 1 of the present embodiment, based on the low-accuracy low-base state in which the jackpot game is not performed, the variable game performed in the low-accuracy low-base state is defined as a "normal game". It can be grasped, and the low accuracy and low base state can be grasped as a "normal gaming state".

On the other hand, the big hit game is a game that can be executed by changing the special symbol and displaying the big hit symbol in a stopped manner, and for the player, the big winning opening (1st big winning opening 30, 2nd big winning opening). Since it is an advantageous game in which a large amount of prize balls can be obtained by entering the game ball into 35), the big hit game can be regarded as a "special game", and the game state in which the big hit game is performed (35). The jackpot game state) can be regarded as a "special game state".

In addition, the high-probability high-base state (probability variation game state) is more advantageous to the player than the low-probability low-base state and the low-probability high-base state (that is, the low-probability state). The variable game performed in the above can be regarded as a "special game", and the high-probability and high-base state can be regarded as a "special game state".

[Main control main processing]
Next, the operation of the game control microcomputer 81 (control processing by the main control unit 80) will be described with reference to FIGS. 10 to 38. The counters, flags, statuses, buffers, etc. that appear in the operation description of the game control microcomputer 81 are provided in the RAM of the main control board 80. Further, in the present specification, "S"("S" in the flowchart) such as S101 means a step.

When the power of the pachinko gaming machine 1 is turned on, the game control microcomputer 81 provided on the main control board 80 reads out the main control main processing program shown in FIG. 10 from the ROM of the main control board 80 and executes it. As shown in the figure, in the main control main process, the initial setting is first performed (S101). In the initial settings, for example, stack settings, constant settings, interrupt time settings, CPU settings of the main control board 80, SIO, PIO, CTC (interrupt time controller) settings, and various flags, status, and counter resets. And so on. The initial value of the flag is "0", that is, "OFF", the initial value of the status is "1", and the initial value of the counter is "0". The initial setting (S101) is executed only once after the power is turned on, and is not executed after that.

Following the initial setting (S101), interrupts are disabled (S102), and normal symbol / special symbol main random number update processing (S103) is executed. In this normal symbol / special symbol main random number update process (S103), the values of the various random number counters shown in FIG. 7 are updated by one. When the value of each random number counter reaches the upper limit, it returns to "0" and is added again. The initial value of each random number counter may be a value other than "0" or may be randomly changed. The updated random number counter values are sequentially stored in a predetermined updated value storage area (not shown) of the RAM of the main control board 80.

When the normal symbol / special symbol main random number update process (S103) is completed, interrupts are enabled (S104). While interrupts are enabled, interrupt processing (S105) can be executed. This interrupt processing (S105) is executed based on an interrupt pulse that is repeatedly input to the CPU of the main control board 80, for example, at a cycle of 4 ms. Then, between the end of the interrupt process (S105) and the start of the next interrupt process (S105), the update process of various counter values by the normal symbol / special symbol main random number update process (S103) is repeated. Will be executed. If an interrupt pulse is input to the CPU in the interrupt disabled state, the interrupt processing (S105) is not started immediately, but is started after the interrupt is enabled (S104).

[Interrupt processing]
Next, interrupt processing (S105) will be described. As shown in FIG. 11, in the interrupt processing (S105), the output processing (S201) is first executed. In the output process (S201), commands (control signals) set in the output buffer provided in the RAM of the main control board 80 are output to the sub control board 90, the payout control board 110, and the like in each process described below. To do. The output command or the like includes information on the game state, the result of the special symbol winning / failing determination, the symbol as the jackpot type (big hit symbol), the fluctuation pattern, and the like. The command is configured to include, for example, 2 bytes of information. In this case, the upper 1 byte is information about the type of command, and the lower 1 byte is information about the content of the command.

In the input process (S202) performed after the output process (S201), various sensors (first start port sensor 20a, second start port sensor 21a, first large winning port sensor) mainly provided in the pachinko gaming machine 1 are provided. The detection signal detected by the 30a, the second large winning opening sensor 35a, the general winning opening sensor 27a, etc. (see FIG. 5) is read and stored in the output buffer of the RAM as the winning ball information. Further, the detection signal from the lower plate full detection sensor that detects the fullness of the lower plate 62 is also taken in and stored in the output buffer of the RAM as the lower plate full data.

The normal symbol / special symbol main random number update process (S203) performed next is the same as the normal symbol / special symbol main random number update process (S103) performed in the main control main process of FIG. That is, the update processing of the various random number counter values (including the normal symbol random number counter value) shown in FIG. 7 is performed after the execution period of the timer interrupt processing (S105) and the other periods (after the end of the interrupt processing (S105)). It is performed both with the period until the next interrupt processing (S105) is started).

Following the normal symbol / special symbol main random number update process (S203), the start port sensor detection process (S204), the normal symbol operation process (S205), the special symbol operation process (S206), and the specific area sensor detection process (S207), which will be described later. , Non-specific area sensor detection process (S208), start ball entry process (S209), and power failure monitoring process (S210) are executed. After that, other processing (S211) not deeply related to the present invention is executed to end the interrupt processing (S105). Then, until the next interrupt pulse is input to the CPU of the main control board 80, the main control main processes S102 to S104 are repeatedly executed (see FIG. 10), and when the interrupt pulse is input (after about 4 ms). ), Interrupt processing (S105) is executed again. In the output process (S201) of the interrupt process (S105) executed again, the command or the like set in the output buffer of the RAM in the previous interrupt process (S105) is output.

[Starting port sensor detection process]
As shown in FIG. 12, in the start port sensor detection process (S204), first, it is determined whether or not the game ball has passed through the gate 28, that is, whether or not the game ball is detected by the gate sensor 28a (S301). .. If the game ball has not passed through the gate 28 (NO in S301), proceed to S305, and if the game ball has passed through the gate 28 (YES in S301), the number of normal symbol hold balls (number of normal symbol hold balls, Specifically, it is determined whether or not the value of the counter provided in the RAM for counting the number of hold of the normal figure) is less than 4 (S302).

If the number of normal symbol reserved balls is not less than 4 (NO in S302), proceed to S305. On the other hand, if the number of normal symbol reserved balls is less than 4 (YES in S302), "1" is added to the number of normal symbol reserved balls (S303), and the normal symbol random number acquisition process (S304) is performed. In the normal symbol random number acquisition process (S304), the value (label-TRND-H) of the random number counter for determining whether the normal symbol is correct or not stored in the update value storage area (not shown) of the RAM is acquired, and the acquired random number value is acquired. (Acquired information) is stored in the address space corresponding to the current number of normal symbol hold balls in the normal figure hold storage unit provided in the RAM of the main control board 80.

In S305, it is determined whether or not the game ball has entered the second starting port 21, that is, whether or not the game ball is detected by the second starting port sensor 21a (S305). When the game ball has not entered the second starting port 21 (NO in S305), the process proceeds to S309 without performing the processes of S306 to S308, and when the game ball has entered the second starting port 21. (YES in S305), the number of special figure 2 hold balls (the number of second special figure hold, specifically, the numerical value of the counter that counts the number of second special figure hold provided in the RAM of the main control unit 80) It is determined whether or not it is less than 4 (upper limit number) (S306). Then, when the number of reserved balls in Special Figure 2 is not less than 4 (NO in S306), the process proceeds to S309 without processing S307 and S308, but when the number of reserved balls in Special Figure 2 is less than 4, (NO in S306). YES in S306), add 1 to the number of reserved balls in Special Figure 2 (S307).

Subsequently, the special figure 2 related random number acquisition process (S308) is performed. In the special figure 2 related random number acquisition process (S308), the value (label-TRND-A) of the random number counter for determining whether the special symbol is correct or not, and the random number for determining the jackpot type, which are stored in the update value storage area (not shown) of the RAM. The counter value (label-TRND-AS) and the fluctuation pattern random number counter value (label-TRND-T1) are acquired (that is, the random number values shown in FIG. 7 (A) are acquired), and the acquired random number values (acquisition) are acquired. Information) is stored in the address space corresponding to the current number of reserved balls in the second special figure 2 in the second special figure reserved storage unit.

Subsequently, in the start port sensor detection process (S204), it is determined whether or not the game ball has entered the first start port 20, that is, whether or not the game ball has been detected by the first start port sensor 20a (S309). ). When the game ball has not entered the first starting port 20 (NO in S309), this process is completed without performing the processing after S310, and when the game ball has entered the first starting port 20. (YES in S309), the number of special figure 1 hold balls (the number of first special figure hold, specifically, the numerical value of the counter for counting the number of first special figure hold provided in the RAM of the main control unit 80) It is determined whether or not it is less than 4 (upper limit number) (S310). Then, when the number of reserved balls in Special Figure 1 is not less than 4 (NO in S310), this processing is completed without performing the processing after S311, and when the number of reserved balls in Special Figure 1 is less than 4 (S310). YES), add "1" to the number of reserved balls in Special Figure 1 (S311).

Subsequently, the special figure 1 related random number acquisition process (S312) is performed. In the special figure 1 related random number acquisition process (S312), the value of the special symbol hit / miss determination counter stored in the update value storage area (not shown) of the RAM is the same as in the special figure 2 related random number acquisition process (S308). (Label-TRND-A), the value of the random number counter for determining the jackpot type (label-TRND-AS), and the value of the fluctuation pattern random number counter (label-TRND-T1) are acquired (that is, the disturbance shown in FIG. 7 (A)). Numerical values are acquired), and the acquired random number values are stored in the address space corresponding to the current number of reserved balls in the first special figure 1 in the first special figure reserved storage unit.

[Public map operation processing]
The game control microcomputer 81 performs the normal drawing operation process (S205) shown in FIG. 13 after the start port sensor detection process (S204). In the normal figure operation process (S205), the process related to the normal symbol display 42 and the variable winning device 22 is divided into four stages, and "normal figure operation status 1, 2, 3, 4" is assigned to each of these stages. .. Then, when the normal symbol operation status is "1" (YES in S401), normal symbol standby processing (S402) is performed, and when it is "2" (NO in S401, YES in S403), normal. Process during symbol change (S404) is performed, and if it is "3" (NO for both S401 and S403, YES for S405), normal symbol confirmation processing (S406) is performed, and if it is "4" ( All of S401, S403, and S405 are NO), and ordinary electric accessory processing (S407) is performed. The normal operation status is "1" by default.

[Normal symbol standby processing]
As shown in FIG. 14, in the normal symbol standby process (S402), first, it is determined whether or not the number of reserved balls of the normal symbol is "0" (S501), and if it is "0" (YES in S501). , This process is completed without performing the process after S502. On the other hand, if the number of reserved balls of the normal symbol is not "0" (NO in S501), the normal symbol hit / fail determination process described later is performed (S502), and then the normal symbol variation pattern selection process is performed (S503). In the normal symbol variation pattern selection process, the normal symbol variation pattern selection table shown in FIG. 8 (D) is referred to, and if the game state is a time saving state, the normal symbol variation pattern having a variation time of 1 second is selected. To do. On the other hand, if the gaming state is a non-time saving state, a normal symbol variation pattern having a normal symbol variation time of 30 seconds is selected.

Next, after performing the normal symbol random number shift processing (S504) described later, the normal symbol fluctuation start processing (S505) is performed, and this processing is completed. In the normal symbol fluctuation start processing (S505), the fluctuation display of the normal symbol is started with the normal symbol fluctuation pattern selected in S503, and the normal operation status is set to "2". Further, in the normal symbol change start process, a normal symbol change start command is set in order to notify the sub-control board 90 of the start of change of the normal symbol.

[Normal symbol hit / fail judgment process]
As shown in FIG. 15, in the normal symbol hit / miss determination process (S502), first, the value (label-TRND-H) of the normal symbol hit / miss determination random number counter stored in the normal symbol hold storage unit is read out (S601). Next, it is determined whether or not the time saving flag is ON (whether or not the gaming state is the time saving state) (S602). When it is determined that the time saving flag is ON, that is, it is in the time saving state (YES in S602), among the normal symbol hit judgment tables shown in FIG. 8 (C), the time saving state table (the hit judgment value is "0" to "0" to Based on the high-probability normal-figure hit / fail determination based on "239"), it is determined whether or not it is a hit (S604), and the process proceeds to S605. That is, it is determined whether or not the value (label-TRND-H) of the read random number counter for determining whether or not the normal symbol is correct matches any of the hit determination values. On the other hand, when it is determined in S602 that the time reduction flag is not ON, that is, it is in the non-time reduction state (NO in S602), the table for the non-time reduction state (hit determination) among the normal symbol hit determination tables shown in FIG. 8 (C). Based on the low-probability normal-figure hit / fail judgment based on the values "0" and "1"), it is judged whether or not it is a hit (S603), and the process proceeds to S605. Then, it is determined whether or not the result of the normal figure hit / miss judgment (S603, S604) is a hit (a normal figure hit) (S605), and if it is determined to be a miss (NO in S605), a stop display is made. Determine (S606), and finish the process. On the other hand, when it is determined in S605 that it is a hit (a hit in a normal figure) (YES in S605), a normal symbol (a symbol per normal figure) to be stopped and displayed is determined (S607), and the normal figure hit flag is turned ON (S608). , Finish the process.

[Ordinary symbol random number shift processing]
As shown in FIG. 16, in the normal symbol random number shift process (S504), first, the number of normal symbol reserved balls is decremented by 1 (S701). Next, the storage location of each Fuzu hold in the Fuzu hold storage unit is shifted by one to the side read from the current position (S702). Then, the address space, which is the storage location of the highest hold storage in the normal figure hold storage unit, is emptied (“0”), that is, the RAM area corresponding to the fourth hold of the normal figure is cleared to 0 (S703). ), Finish this process. In this way, the general map hold is digested in the order of hold.

[Processing during normal symbol change]
As shown in FIG. 17, in the normal symbol fluctuation processing (S404), first, it is determined whether or not the fluctuation time of the normal symbol has elapsed (S801), and if not (NO in S801), the processing after S802. This process is completed without performing. On the other hand, if the fluctuation time of the normal symbol has elapsed (YES in S801), the normal symbol fluctuation stop command is set (S802) and the normal symbol operation status is set to "3" (S803). Then, other processing such as stopping the variable display of the normal symbol at the display result (hit normal symbol or out-of-order normal symbol) according to the judgment result of the random number for determining whether or not the normal symbol is correct is performed (S804), and this processing is completed. ..

[Normal symbol confirmation process]
As shown in FIG. 18, in the normal symbol determination process (S406), first, it is determined whether or not the normal symbol hit flag is ON (S901). If the normal map hit flag is not ON (NO in S901), the normal map operation status is set to "1" (S905), and this process ends. On the other hand, if the flag per normal figure is ON (YES in S901), it is determined whether or not the time saving flag is ON, that is, whether or not the time saving state is in progress (S902). Then, if it is in the time saving state (YES in S902), the opening pattern in the time saving state is set as the opening pattern of the variable winning device 22 (second starting port 21) (S903). As described above, the opening pattern in the time saving state is an opening pattern in which the opening for 2.0 seconds is repeated three times. Therefore, "3" is set in the second start port opening counter that counts the number of times the second start port 21 is opened.

On the other hand, if it is in the non-time saving state (NO in S902), the opening pattern in the non-time saving state is set as the opening pattern of the variable winning device 22 (second starting port 21) (S906). As described above, the opening pattern in the non-time saving state is an opening pattern in which opening for 0.2 seconds is performed once. Therefore, "1" is set in the second start port opening counter. Then, following the set of the open pattern (S903, S906), the normal figure operation status is set to "4" (S904), and this processing is completed.

[Normal electric accessory processing]
As shown in FIG. 19, in the ordinary electric accessory processing (S407), first, it is determined whether or not the end flag per normal figure is ON (S1001). The normal figure hit end flag is a flag indicating that the opening of the second start port 21 has been completed in the auxiliary game executed as a hit.

If the end flag per normal figure is not ON (NO in S1001), it is determined whether or not the second starting port 21 is being opened (S1002). If it is not open (NO in S1002), it is determined whether or not the time (timing) to open the second starting port 21 has been reached (S1003), and if not (NO in S1003), this process is completed and the process is reached. If so, the second starting port 21 is opened (S1004), and this process is completed. On the other hand, if the second starting port 21 is being opened (YES in S1002), it is determined in advance whether or not the time (timing) for closing the second starting port 21 has been reached (that is, after the second starting port 21 is opened). Judging (whether or not the opened opening time has passed) (S1005), if not reached (NO in S1005), this process is completed, and if reached (YES in S1005), the second starting port 21 is closed (closed). ) (S1006).

Following the closing process (S1006) of the second starting port 21, the value of the second starting port opening counter is decremented by 1 (S1007), and it is determined whether or not the value of the second starting port opening counter is "0". (S1008). If it is not "0" (NO in S1008), this process is finished as it is in order to open the second starting port 21 again. On the other hand, if the value of the second start opening opening counter is "0" (YES in S1008), the end processing per normal figure (S1009) for ending the auxiliary game is performed, and the end flag per normal figure is set ( S1010), this process is completed. The second start port opening counter becomes "0" when the second start port 21 is opened three times (opening operation of the opening / closing member 23) in the non-time reduction state, and is set to "0" in the non-time reduction state. When the second starting port 21 is opened once, it becomes "0".

On the other hand, when it is determined in S1001 that the end flag per normal figure is ON (YES in S1001), the opening operation of the second starting port 21 for the number of times set in S903 or S906 has been completed. , Turn off the normal figure hit end flag (S1011), turn off the normal figure hit flag (S1012), set the normal figure operation status to "1" (S1013), and finish this process. As a result, in the next interrupt process, the normal symbol standby process (S402) is executed again as the normal symbol operation process (S205).

[Special figure operation processing]
As shown in FIG. 11, the game control microcomputer 81 performs the special figure operation process (S206) after the normal figure operation process (S205). As shown in FIG. 20, in the special figure operation process (S206), the processes related to the special symbol display 41 and the large prize device (first large prize device 31, second large prize device 36) are divided into four stages, and these are divided into four stages. "Special figure operation status 1, 2, 3, 4" is assigned to each stage of. Then, when the special symbol operation status is "1" (YES in S1101), the special symbol standby process (S1102) is performed, and when it is "2" (NO in S1101, YES in S1103), special. Process during symbol change (S1104), if it is "3" (NO for both S1101 and S1103, YES for S1105), perform special symbol confirmation processing (S1106), and if it is "4" ( NO) for S1101, S1103, and S1105, and special electric accessory processing (S1107) as a big hit game. The special figure operation status is "1" by default.

[Special symbol standby processing]
As shown in FIG. 21, in the special symbol standby process (S1102), first, it is determined whether or not the number of reserved balls in the second starting port 21 (that is, the number of reserved balls in special figure 2) is “0” (S1201). .. Special Figure 2 When the number of reserved balls is "0" (YES in S1201), that is, when there is no memory of the random number counter value acquired due to the entry of balls into the second starting port 21, the first start It is determined whether or not the number of reserved balls in the mouth 20 (that is, the number of reserved balls in Special Figure 1) is "0" (S1206). Then, when the number of reserved spheres in Special Figure 1 is also "0" (YES in S1206), that is, when there is no memory of the random number counter value acquired due to the entry of the sphere into the first starting port 20, the image It is determined whether or not the process of using the display screen 7a of the display device 7 as the standby screen (during the execution of the demo screen for waiting for customers) is in progress (S1211), and if so (YES in S1211), the process of S1212. If this process is completed without performing (NO in S1211), the standby screen setting process is executed to display the standby screen (S1212).

When it is determined in S1201 that the number of reserved balls in Special Figure 2 is not "0" (NO in S1201), that is, there is one or more memories of the random number counter value acquired due to the entry of the ball into the second starting port 21. In this case, the special figure 2 hit / fail determination process (S1202), the special figure 2 fluctuation pattern selection process (S1203), the special figure 2 random number shift process (S1204), and the special figure 2 fluctuation start process (S1205) are performed in this order. .. Further, when the number of reserved balls in Special Figure 2 is "0" but the number of reserved balls in Special Figure 1 is not "0" (YES in S1201 and NO in S1206), that is, the random number counter value related to the second starting port 21 Although there is no memory, if there is one or more memory of the random number counter value acquired due to the entry into the first starting port 20, the special figure 1 hit / miss judgment process (S1207) and the special figure 1 variation described later will be described. The pattern selection process (S1208), the special figure 1 random number shift process (S1209), and the special figure 1 fluctuation start process (S1210) are performed in this order. As described above, in this embodiment, the variation display of the first special symbol based on the first special symbol hold is performed only when the number of balls held in the special figure 2 is "0" (YES in S1201). That is, the digestion of the second special symbol reservation (variation display of the second special symbol) is executed in preference to the digestion of the first special symbol reservation (variation display of the first special symbol). And in this embodiment, the hit / fail judgment based on the second special figure hold is more likely to be a big hit that is more profitable for the player than the hit / fail judgment based on the first special figure hold (FIG. 8 (B)). See).

[Special Figure 2 Win / Loss Judgment Process]
As shown in FIG. 22, in the special figure 2 hit / miss determination process (S1202), first, as a determination value, the lowest area of the second special figure hold storage unit of the RAM (that is, the first one of the second special figure hold) is supported. The value (label-TRND-A) of the random number counter for determining whether the special symbol is correct or not (the oldest stored) stored in the RAM area) is read (S1301). Next, it is determined whether or not the probability variation flag is ON, that is, whether or not it is in a high probability state (S1302). Then, if it is not in the high probability state (NO in S1302), that is, if it is in the normal state, the jackpot determination table for the normal state (the jackpot determination value is "3"" in the jackpot determination table (see FIG. 8A). And "397"), the pass / fail judgment is made (S1303). On the other hand, if it is in the high probability state (YES in S1302), the hit / fail judgment is performed based on the jackpot determination table for the high probability state in the jackpot determination table (see FIG. 8A) (S1304). In the jackpot determination table for high probability states, the jackpot determination values are "3", "53", "113", "173", "227", "281", "337", "397", "449". , "503".

When the result of the hit / fail judgment (S1303, S1304) is "big hit" (YES in S1305), the value of the random number counter for determining the big hit type (label-TRND-AS) is read out, and the big hit type shown in FIG. 8 (B) is read. The jackpot type is determined based on the determination table (S1307), the jackpot symbol is determined based on the value of the random number for determining the jackpot type (S1308), the jackpot flag is turned ON (S1309), and this process is completed. On the other hand, if the result of the hit / fail judgment (S1303, S1304) is not "big hit" ("miss") (NO in S1305), the missed symbol is determined (S1306), and this process ends.

Here, in determining the jackpot type, in the case of the hit / fail determination related to the first special symbol, the jackpot type is determined using the jackpot type determination table for the first special symbol, and the hit / fail determination related to the second special symbol is made. In this case, the jackpot type is determined using the jackpot type determination table for the second special symbol. It should be noted that the special symbol hit / fail judgment and the jackpot type determination judgment may be referred to as "judgment", respectively, or may be referred to as "judgment" including which jackpot symbol is obtained by performing the jackpot judgment. Further, the main control unit 80 (game control microcomputer 81) that executes the hit / fail determination (S1303, S1304) related to the second special symbol functions as a “second hit / miss determination means”.

[Special figure 2 fluctuation pattern selection process]
As shown in FIG. 21, in the special symbol standby process (S1102), the special figure 2 variation pattern selection process is performed (S1203) after the special figure 2 hit / fail determination process (S1202). As shown in FIGS. 23 and 24, in the special figure 2 variation pattern selection process (S1203), first, it is determined whether or not the game state is the time saving state (whether or not the time saving flag is ON) (S1401). .. As a result, if it is determined that the time saving state is not (NO in S1401), that is, if it is in the non-time saving state, then it is determined whether or not the jackpot flag is ON (S1402).

When it is determined in S1402 that the jackpot flag is ON (YES in S1402), refer to the non-time saving state jackpot table (the part of the variation pattern table shown in FIG. 9 corresponding to the non-time saving state and jackpot). Fluctuation pattern A variation pattern is selected based on a random number counter value (label-TRND-T1) (S1403). In this embodiment, any of the fluctuation patterns P1 to P3 is selected. In this embodiment, if the fluctuation pattern is determined, the fluctuation time is also determined. Then, the process proceeds to S1404.

On the other hand, when it is determined in S1402 that the jackpot flag is not ON (NO in S1402), then it is determined whether or not the number of reserved second special symbols is "1" or "2" (S1405). Since the number of holdings referred to here is the number of storages including the information for which the fluctuation pattern is determined by this processing, the number of holdingss is set to any value of "1" to "4". Then, when it is determined in S1405 that the number of holds is either "1" or "2" (YES in S1405), the first table for removing the number of holds (the variable pattern table shown in FIG. The fluctuation pattern is selected based on the fluctuation pattern random number counter value (label-TRND-T1) with reference to the outlier and the portion corresponding to the number of reserved balls "1, 2" (S1406). In this embodiment, any of the fluctuation patterns P4 to P7 is selected. On the other hand, when it is determined in S1405 that the number of holds is neither "1" nor "2", that is, it is either "3" or "4" (NO in S1405), the table for removing the second hold number. (Part of the fluctuation pattern table shown in FIG. 9, which is in a non-time saving state, is out of time, and corresponds to the number of reserved balls "3, 4"), and fluctuates based on the fluctuation pattern random number counter value (label-TRND-T1). Select a pattern (S1407). In this embodiment, any of the fluctuation patterns P8 to P11 is selected. Further, the first reserved number out-of-number table is set with a higher possibility of selecting a fluctuation pattern of a relatively long fluctuation time than the second hold number out-of-number table. In addition, the shortest variable time (12000 ms) that can be selected is also set to be longer than that of the table for removing the number of reserved numbers (4000 ms).

Further, when it is determined in S1401 that the time is shortened (YES in S1401), as shown in FIG. 24, it is determined whether or not the jackpot flag is ON (S1408). As a result, when it is determined that the jackpot flag is ON (YES in S1408), the variation pattern is referred to in the time-saving state jackpot table (the part of the variation pattern table shown in FIG. 9 that corresponds to the time-saving state and the jackpot). The variation pattern is selected based on the random number counter value (label-TRND-T1) (S1409). In this embodiment, any of the fluctuation patterns P12 to P14 is selected.

On the other hand, when it is determined in S1408 that the jackpot flag is not ON (NO in S1408), it is determined whether or not the number of holds is "1" (S1410). The number of holdings referred to here is the same as described above, and the number of holdings is set to any value of "1" to "4". When it is determined in S1410 that the number of held balls is "1" (YES in S1410), it corresponds to the third hold number out-of-order table (among the fluctuation pattern tables shown in FIG. The fluctuation pattern is selected based on the fluctuation pattern random number counter value (label-TRND-T1) with reference to (S1411). In this embodiment, any of the fluctuation patterns P15 to P18 is selected.

Further, when it is determined in S1410 that the number of reservations is not "1", that is, the number of reservations is any of "2" to "4" (NO in S1410), the fourth table for removing the number of reservations (FIG. In the fluctuation pattern table shown in 9, the fluctuation pattern is selected based on the fluctuation pattern random number counter value (label-TRND-T1) with reference to the time-saving state, the deviation, and the number of reserved balls "2 to 4"). (S1411). In this embodiment, any of the fluctuation patterns P19 to P22 is selected. Here, the fluctuation pattern selected in the case of the time saving state and the deviation is more likely to be selected as the fluctuation pattern selected in the case of the non-time saving state and the deviation. There is. This is because the digestion speed of the special figure hold is accelerated (the game during the time reduction is rapidly advanced) by allowing more fluctuation patterns with a short fluctuation time to be selected in the time reduction state.

After selecting the variation pattern as described above, another process shown in FIG. 23 is performed (S1404), and this process is completed. In the other processing (S1404), a processing such as setting a variation pattern specification command according to the selected variation pattern in the output buffer of the RAM is performed. Further, the variation pattern designation command set in this process is included in the variation start command described later, and is transmitted to the sub-control unit 90 by the output process (S201).

[Special Figure 2 Random number shift processing]
As shown in FIG. 25, in the special figure 2 random number shift process (S1204), first, the number of reserved balls in the special figure 2 is decremented by 1 (S1501). Next, when the storage location of various counter values in the second special figure reservation storage unit is provided on the lower side (for example, when the second special figure reservation storage unit has an address space corresponding to addresses "0000" to "0003"). Shift to the address "0000" side) (S1502). Then, "0" is set in the uppermost address space of the second special figure reservation storage unit, that is, the RAM area corresponding to the fourth item of the second special figure reservation (when the upper limit number is stored). Is cleared to 0 (S1503), and this process is completed.

After executing the special figure 2 random number shift process (S1204), the special figure 2 fluctuation start process (S1205) is executed as shown in FIG. In the special figure 2 fluctuation start processing (S1205), the special figure operation status is set to "2", the fluctuation start command is set in the output buffer of the RAM, and the fluctuation display of the second special symbol is started.

Further, in the special symbol standby process (S1102) shown in FIG. 21, when the number of reserved balls in special figure 2 is "0" and the number of reserved balls in special figure 1 is not "0" (YES in S1201, NO in S1206). ), The special figure 1 hit / fail determination process (S1207), the special figure 1 fluctuation pattern selection process (S1208), the special figure 1 random number shift process (S1209), and the special figure 1 fluctuation start process (S1210) are performed in this order.

[Special Figure 1 Win / Loss Judgment Process]
As shown in FIG. 26, in the special figure 1 hit / fail determination process (S1207), each process of S1601 to S1609 is performed in the same flow as the special figure 2 hit / fail determination process (S1202) shown in FIG. Therefore, a detailed description of this process will be omitted. However, since this process is related to the special figure 1, in S1601, it is stored in the lowest area of the first special figure hold storage unit of the RAM (that is, the RAM area corresponding to the first one of the first special figure hold). The random number counter value (label-TRND-A) for determining whether or not the special symbol is correct is read out and processed. The main control unit 80 (game control microcomputer 81) that executes the hit / fail determination (S1603, S1604) related to the first special symbol functions as the “first hit / miss determination means”.

[Special figure 1 fluctuation pattern selection process]
As shown in FIGS. 27 and 28, in the special figure 1 variation pattern selection process (S1208), processing (S1701 to S1712) is performed in the same flow as the special figure 2 variation pattern selection process (S1403) shown in FIGS. 23 and 24. )I do. Therefore, a detailed explanation of this process is omitted.

[Special Figure 1 Random number shift processing]
As shown in FIG. 29, in the special figure 1 random number shift process (S1209), first, the number of reserved balls in the special figure 1 is decremented by 1 (S1801). Next, the storage location of various counter values in the first special figure reservation storage unit is shifted to the lower side by one (S2002). Then, "0" is set in the uppermost address space of the first special figure reservation storage unit, that is, the RAM area corresponding to the fourth item of the first special figure reservation (when stored up to the upper limit number). Clear 0 (S1803) to finish this process.

After executing the special figure 1 random number shift process (S1209), the special figure 1 fluctuation start process (S1210) is executed as shown in FIG. In the special figure 1 fluctuation start processing (S1210), the special figure operation status is set to "2", the fluctuation start command is set in the output buffer of the RAM, and the fluctuation display of the first special symbol is started.

[Processing during special symbol change]
As shown in FIG. 30, in the special symbol variation processing (S1104), first, the variation time of the special symbol (the variation time determined according to the variation pattern selected in S1203 or S1208 of FIG. 21, see FIG. 9) elapses. It is determined whether or not it has been done (S1901). If it is determined that the fluctuation time has not elapsed (NO in S1901), the process ends. As a result, the variable display of the special symbol is continued.

On the other hand, if it is determined that the fluctuation time has elapsed (YES in S1901), the fluctuation stop command is set (S1902). Next, it is determined whether or not the probability variation flag is ON (S1903), if it is ON (YES in S1903), the probability variation counter is subtracted by 1 (S1904), and whether or not the value of the probability variation counter is "0". Is determined (S1905). When it is determined that the value of the probability change counter is "0" (YES in S1905), the probability change flag is turned OFF (S1906), and the process proceeds to S1907. On the other hand, when it is determined that the probability variation flag is not ON (NO in S1903), or when it is determined that the value of the probability variation counter is not "0" (NO in S1905), the process proceeds to S1907.

In S1907, it is determined whether or not the time saving flag is ON (S1907), and when it is determined that the time saving flag is ON (YES in S1907), the number of fluctuation display times of the special symbol executed during the time saving state is counted. The value of the time saving counter is subtracted by 1 (S1908), and it is determined whether or not the value of the time saving counter is "0" (S1909). If the value of the time reduction counter is "0" (YES in S1909), the time reduction flag is turned off (S1910), and the process proceeds to S1911. If it is determined that the time saving flag is not ON (NO in S1907), or if it is determined that the value of the time saving counter is not "0" (NO in S1909), the process proceeds to S1911.

In S1911, the special figure operation status is set to "3" (S1911). Next, other processing such as stopping the variable display of the special symbol at a result corresponding to the determination result of the special symbol winning / failing determination random number and the jackpot type determination random number is performed (S1912), and this processing is completed. When the game control microcomputer 81 stops (ends) the variation display of the special symbol, the stop display time (stop display period) of the special symbol (stop symbol) is set. Then, when the set stop display time (stop display period) elapses, the special symbol confirmation process (S1106) is performed.

The process of turning off the probability change flag based on the value of the probability change counter becoming "0" and turning off the time reduction flag based on the value of the time reduction counter becoming "0" (S1906, The main control unit 80 (game control microcomputer 81) that executes S1910) functions as a “game state control means” or a “mode setting means”.

[Special symbol confirmation process]
As shown in FIG. 31, in the special symbol determination process (S1106), first, it is determined whether or not the jackpot flag is ON (S2001). If the jackpot flag is ON (YES in S2001), it is determined whether or not the type of jackpot this time is 15R jackpot (15R 8th jackpot or 15R 9th jackpot) (S2002). As a result, when it is determined that the type of the jackpot this time is a 15R jackpot (YES in S2002), "15" is set to the value of the round counter that counts the number of rounds to be executed during the jackpot game (S2003). Move to S2006 processing. On the other hand, when it is determined that the type of the jackpot this time is not the 15R jackpot (NO in S2002), the jackpot type is the 7R jackpot (any of the 7R 1st to 7th jackpots), so the value of the round counter is "7". Is set (S2005), and the process proceeds to S2006.

In S2006, the lighting pattern data that determines the display mode (lighting mode) of the round display 45 is set (S2006), and the process proceeds to S2007. Specifically, the lighting pattern data of the two LEDs (7R lamp, 15R lamp) constituting the round display 45 according to the above-mentioned determination result of S2002, that is, the type (number of rounds) of the jackpot this time. Is set (S2006). When the set lighting pattern data is output by the output process (S201), the LED (round lamp) of the round display 45 is lit according to the lighting pattern data.

In S2007, lighting pattern data for determining the display mode (lighting mode) of the hit indicator 48 is set (S2007), and the process proceeds to S2008. As described above, in the hit indicator 48, when a big hit occurs (when the big hit symbol is displayed), the special symbol hit / fail judgment that triggered the big hit is the first special symbol hit / fail judgment and the second special symbol. It indicates which of the judgments is correct or not. The pachinko gaming machine 1 of this embodiment has two types of jackpots, "7R jackpot" (7R 1st to 7th jackpots) and "15R jackpot" (15R 8th and 9th jackpots), and "7R jackpot". Is a big hit type when a big hit is made in the first special symbol hit / fail judgment, and "15R big hit" is a big hit type when a big hit is made in the second special symbol hit / fail judgment (see FIG. 6). Therefore, in this embodiment, the lighting pattern data of the three LEDs constituting the hit indicator 48 is set based on the determination result of S2002 described above (S2007). That is, when it is determined in S2002 that the type of the jackpot this time is a 15R jackpot (YES in S2002), the jackpot this time is based on the second special symbol hit / fail judgment (also referred to as "special figure 2 jackpot"). Therefore, as the lighting pattern data corresponding to this, the data for lighting the LEDs "b1" and "b3" among the three LEDs "b1 to b3" shown in FIG. 4 is set. On the other hand, when it is determined in S2002 that the type of the jackpot this time is not the 15R jackpot (NO in S2002), the type of the jackpot this time is the 7R jackpot, and the jackpot is based on the first special symbol hit / fail judgment ("Special figure". Since it is also referred to as “1 big hit”), as lighting pattern data corresponding to this, data for lighting the LEDs “b1” and “b2” among the three LEDs “b1 to b3” shown in FIG. set. When the set lighting pattern data is output by the output process (S201), the LED of the hit indicator 48 lights according to the lighting pattern data.

In this embodiment, the 7R jackpot is set as the special figure 1 jackpot, and the 15R jackpot is set as the special figure 2 jackpot. As a result of the first special symbol hit / fail judgment, the 15R jackpot is not derived and the second As a result of the special symbol winning / failing determination, the 7R jackpot is not derived (see FIG. 6). Therefore, when setting the lighting pattern data of the hit indicator 48 in S2007, it is set based on the determination result (type of the big hit that occurred) in S2002. On the other hand, for example, when a common jackpot type is set for the special figure 1 jackpot and the special figure 2 jackpot, the type of the special symbol winning / failing judgment that triggered the jackpot is only the type of the jackpot that occurred ( Since it is not possible to determine whether or not the first special symbol is correct or not, it is not possible to determine the lighting pattern data of the hit indicator 48 based on the type of jackpot that has occurred. Therefore, in such a case, for example, the jackpot flags set in the above-mentioned S1309 and S1609 correspond to the special figure 1 jackpot (for example, "special figure 1 jackpot flag") and the special figure 2 jackpot. It may be provided separately from the thing (for example, "special figure 2 big hit flag"). In this way, by determining the type of the jackpot flag that is ON (special figure 1 jackpot flag or special figure 2 jackpot flag), it is possible to determine whether or not the special symbol is correct or not, which triggered the jackpot when a jackpot occurs. It is possible to determine the type, and thereby it is possible to appropriately determine the lighting pattern data of the hit indicator 48.

Next, in S2008, a big winning opening opening pattern according to the type of big hit (type of big hit) is set (S2008), and the process proceeds to S2009. As described above, the opening pattern of the big winning opening is determined according to the type of big hit (see FIG. 6). Specifically, if it is any of the 7R 1st jackpot to the 7th jackpot, an opening pattern for the 7R jackpot corresponding to each jackpot is set, and if it is the 15R 8th jackpot or the 15R 9th jackpot, respectively. Set the opening pattern for the 15R jackpot corresponding to the jackpot. Then, in each jackpot game, the opening / closing operation of the jackpot (special ball slot) is executed according to the corresponding jackpot opening pattern.

Next, the movable piece operation timing according to the type of jackpot is set (S2009), and the process proceeds to S2010. As described above, the operation of the movable piece 150 in the V round (fifth round in this embodiment) is performed based on the number of game balls entered into the second large winning opening 35 (V attacker). The number of balls that trigger the operation is determined according to the type of jackpot (see FIG. 48). Specifically, "the first predetermined value (c1) corresponding to the number of balls that specify the first operation timing" and "the ball that specifies the second operation timing" are predetermined according to the type of jackpot. A second predetermined value (c2) corresponding to the number is set (predetermined value setting means). In this embodiment, "1" is set as the first predetermined value (c1), and "2" is set as the second predetermined value (c2). The operation control of the movable piece 150 is performed based on the value set in S2009 and the counting value (the number of balls entering the V attacker) by the ball entry counting means in the V round (fifth round). The second predetermined value (c2) is not set when the type of jackpot is "V non-passing scheduled jackpot", but is set only when the jackpot type is "V passing scheduled jackpot".

In S2010, a jackpot opening command is set to start the jackpot game (S2010). The opening command is defined according to the type of jackpot, and is provided for each jackpot, such as the opening command for the 7R first jackpot and the opening command for the 7R second jackpot. Then, the opening period corresponding to the set opening command is set.

The main control unit 80 transmits the set opening command to the sub control unit 90 at a predetermined timing by the output process (S201). Then, the sub-control unit 90 that has received the opening command is supposed to perform a predetermined game effect corresponding to the opening period.

In S2011, the opening period of the jackpot game will be started (S2011), and the special figure operation status will be set to "4" (S2012). If it is determined in S2001 that the jackpot flag is not ON (NO in S2001), the special figure operation status is set to "1" (S2013), and the process ends.

The opening period is set before the first opening operation of the jackpot in the jackpot game is started, and after the stop display time (stop display period) of the special symbol (effect symbol) stopped and displayed by the jackpot symbol has elapsed. It is a period, which is a period during which the variable display (variable game) of the special symbol (directed symbol) cannot be executed. The opening period is also called the "starting period". In addition, the effect executed during the opening period (start period) is also referred to as "opening effect" or "start effect". The length of the opening period (opening time) is generally set to a length that allows the player to recognize that the jackpot game is started, and is longer than the jackpot stop display time. It may be a short time, or it may be the same time as the jackpot stop display time. Further, the length of the opening period (opening time) may be different depending on the game state when the big hit occurs and the type of the big hit.

The main control unit 80 (game control microcomputer 81) that executes the processes of S2010 and S2011 functions as an “opening period setting means”.

[Special electric accessory processing (big hit game)]
As shown in FIG. 32, in the special electric accessory processing (S1107), first, it is determined whether or not the probability variation flag is ON (S2101), and when it is determined that the probability variation flag is ON (YES in S2101), The probability change flag is turned off (S2102), and then it is determined whether or not the time saving flag is ON (S2103). When it is determined in S2103 that the time saving flag is ON (YES in S2103), the time saving flag is turned OFF (S2104), and the process proceeds to S2105. If it is determined in S2101 that the probability change flag is not ON (NO in S2101), the probability change flag is OFF, so the process proceeds to S2103 without processing S2102. If it is determined in S2103 that the time saving flag is not ON (NO in S2103), the time saving flag is OFF, so the process proceeds to S2105 without performing S2104 processing. That is, during the execution of the jackpot game, it is controlled to a low probability state and a non-time saving state. In this embodiment, since the low base state is always in the non-time saving state, the low base state is also controlled during the execution of the jackpot game.

Next, it is determined whether or not the jackpot end flag is ON (S2105). The jackpot end flag is a flag indicating that all the opening processes of the jackpot winning devices (first jackpot device 31 and second jackpot device 36) have been completed (all rounds have been completed) in the jackpot game. When it is determined that the jackpot end flag is not ON (NO in S2105), then it is determined whether or not it is the start time of the round (S2106). This is determined based on the big winning opening opening pattern set for each big hit type described above. For example, if it is before the start of the first round, it is determined whether or not it is the timing when the opening period ends and the first opening process of the first round is executed. Further, if it is after the first round has already started, it is determined whether or not the previous round has ended and the predetermined interval period has ended.

If it is determined by S2106 that it is time to start the round (YES in S2106), the round start command of the corresponding round is set (S2107), the big winning opening processing is performed (S2108), and this processing is completed. As a result, the big winning opening is opened and a predetermined round is started. In S2107, a round start command that can specify the starting round is set, such as "1R start command" for the start of the first round and "2R start command" for the start of the second round. .. The set round start command is transmitted to the sub-control unit 90 by the output processing of S201. Further, in the big winning opening opening process of S2108, the big winning opening opening pattern determined according to the type of jackpot to be executed, and the opening pattern defined in the starting round is started.

On the other hand, if it is determined in S2106 that it is not the round start time (NO in S2106), the process proceeds to S2111. Here, examples of determining that it is not the round start time include, for example, during the opening period before the start of one round, during the execution of the round, and during the interval period after the end of the round. In S2111, it is determined whether or not the round is being executed, that is, whether or not the large winning opening opening operation based on the predetermined opening pattern started in S2108 is being executed (S2111). As a result, when it is determined that the round is being executed (the large winning opening opening operation is being executed) (YES in S2111), it is determined whether or not the executing round is a V round (S2112). As described above, since the fifth round of the jackpot game is the V round in this embodiment, it is determined here whether or not it is the fifth round. If the running round is a V round (fifth round) (YES in S2112), the V round processing described later is performed (S2113), and if it is not a V round (NO in S2112), a V round processing (S2113) is performed. ) Is not performed, and the process shifts to S2114.

In S2114, it is determined whether or not the round end condition of the running round is satisfied (S2114). Here, as the round end condition of this embodiment, (1) the round execution time (“25 seconds” in this embodiment) defined for the running round has elapsed (or is defined for the running round). The opening pattern has been completed), and (2) the specified number of game balls (“9” in this embodiment) specified in the running round have been entered in the running round. The conditions are set. Then, when either of the conditions is satisfied, the round end condition is satisfied based on the condition that is satisfied earlier. If it is determined in S2114 that the round end condition is not satisfied (NO in S2114), this process ends without performing the process after S2115.

On the other hand, if it is determined that the round end condition is satisfied in S2114 (YES in S2114), the round end command of the corresponding round is set (S2115), and the process proceeds to S2116. In S2115, a round end command that can specify the end round is set, such as "1R end command" if the first round ends and "2R end command" if the second round ends. The set round end command is transmitted to the sub-control unit 90 by the output processing of S201.

In S2116, at the end of the round, the big winning opening (1st big winning opening 30 or 2nd big winning opening 35) is closed, and a process of setting a predetermined interval time (large winning opening closing process) is performed (S2116). .. In this embodiment, two types of time, "2000 ms (2 seconds)" and "200 ms (0.2 seconds)", are provided as the interval time between rounds, and the interval time set at the end of the V round (fifth round). The interval period between the player and the sixth round) is set to "2000 ms", and the interval time set at the end of the other rounds is set to "200 ms". At the end of the V round, the V round ends in order to secure time for determining the match / mismatch between the number of balls entered and the number of ejected balls in the V round from the viewpoint of monitoring the presence or absence of ball clogging and preventing fraud. The later interval time is set to "2000 ms", and the interval time between the other rounds is set to "200 ms". As a result, it is possible to quickly and smoothly open the first prize opening 30 and the second prize opening 35 alternately in the other rounds while monitoring the ball jam in the V round and preventing fraud.

Next, in S2117, it is determined whether or not the interval time set in the previous large winning opening closing process (S2116) has elapsed (S2117). This process of S2117 is also a process performed after it is determined that the round is not being executed in S2111 (NO in S2111). If it is determined by S2117 that the interval time has not elapsed (NO in S2117), if it is determined that this process has been completed and has elapsed (YES in S2117), the value of the round counter is decremented by 1 (S2118). , It is determined whether or not the value of the round counter is "0" (S2119). Then, when it is determined that the value of the round counter is not "0" (NO in S2119), this process ends in order to start the next round. On the other hand, when it is determined that the value of the round counter is "0" (YES in S2119), the jackpot end process (S2120) for ending the jackpot game is executed. In the jackpot end process (S2120), the jackpot ending command is set and the jackpot ending period is started. Next, the jackpot end flag is turned ON (S2121), and this process is completed. The value of the round counter becomes "0" when all the rounds in the big hit to be executed are completed.

Here, in the jackpot end process (S2120), the process of setting the ending command is performed, and the set ending command is the game state at the time of a jackpot and the type information of the jackpot from among a plurality of ending commands. And, based on the ON / OFF of the V flag, any ending command is selected and set. The ending period to be executed (set) differs depending on the type of ending command to be set.

The ending period is after all the opening operations of the big winning openings (1st big winning opening 30 and 2nd big winning opening 35) in the big hit game are completed, and the variable display of the special symbol (directed symbol) can be executed. It is a period set before. The ending period is also called the "end period". During the ending period (end period), the big prize opening will be closed. The effect executed during the ending period (end period) is also referred to as "ending effect" or "end effect".

Further, in the V round (in the big hit game), the information indicating the result of passing through the specific area as to whether or not the game ball has passed through the specific area is also referred to as "specific area information". This specific area information indicates that the game ball has passed the specific area in the V round (V flag: ON) and that the game ball has not passed the specific area in the V round (V flag: OFF). The ending period determining means (ending period determining means) having the information to be shown and determining the ending period can determine the ending period based on the specific area information.

If it is determined in S2105 that the jackpot end flag is ON (YES in S2105), since the final round in the jackpot game has ended, it is determined whether or not the execution time of the jackpot ending effect has elapsed (S2122). ), If it is determined that the ending time has not passed (NO in S2122), the process ends. On the other hand, when it is determined that the ending time has elapsed (YES in S2122), the jackpot end flag is turned off (S2123), and the game state setting process (S2124) described later is performed. Next, the jackpot flag is turned off (S2125), the special figure operation status is set to "1" (S2126), and the process is completed. As a result, in the next interrupt process, the special symbol standby process (S1102) is executed again as the special symbol operation process (S206).

The main control unit 80 (game control microcomputer 81) that executes the above special electric accessory processing (S1107) functions as a "special game execution means", and the special electric accessory processing (S1107) displays the game state. Since it is also a process of controlling the jackpot game state (special game state), the main control unit 80 (game control microcomputer 81) also functions as a “game state control means”. Further, among the special symbol operation processes (S206), the main control unit 80 (game control microcomputer 81) that executes the special symbol standby process (S1102), the special symbol changing process (S1104), and the special symbol determination process (S1106). Functions as a "variable game execution means".

[V round processing]
As shown in FIG. 33, in the V-round processing (S2113), first, the number of game balls entered into the V-attacker (second major winning opening 35) during the V-round, that is, by the above-mentioned means for counting the number of entered balls. It is determined whether or not the count value is the first predetermined value (c1) (S2701). As described above, in the V round, the movable piece 150 is operated based on the number of balls entered into the V attacker during the V round, and the number of balls entered that triggers the operation is determined. "1 predetermined value (first count value)" and "second predetermined value (second count value)" are set in the above-mentioned S2009. In S2701, is the counting value by the ball entry counting means in this V round set to "the first predetermined value (c1) corresponding to the number of balls entering that specifies the first operation timing" set in S2009? It is judged whether or not. In this embodiment, the first predetermined value (c1) is set to "1" regardless of the jackpot type (see FIG. 48), so if the counting value by the ball entry counting means is "1" (YES in S2701). ), S2702 processing is performed, and if it is not "1" (NO in S2701), the process proceeds to S2703 processing without performing S2702 processing.

In S2702, a specific area opening / closing process for opening / closing the specific area 39 is performed by operating the movable piece 150 (S2702). Since the specific area opening / closing process here corresponds to the first operation of the movable piece 150 based on the number of balls entering the V attacker being "1", the operation of the movable piece 150 in this case is specified. This is performed in a short opening operation pattern (first operation mode) in which the region 39 is opened by 80 ms (see FIG. 49).

Further, in S2702, a specific area validity period is set by operating the movable piece 150. The specific area validity period is a period for determining that the detection of the game ball by the specific area sensor 39a is valid (giving a privilege). The period other than the valid period is a period for determining that the detection of the game ball by the specific area sensor 39a is invalid (no privilege is granted). When the game ball is detected by the specific area sensor 39a during a period other than the specific area valid period (outside the specific area valid period), the detection is determined to be invalid and an error regarding the passage of the game ball to the specific area 39 occurs. It is determined that a kind of "abnormal passage through a specific area" has occurred (error determination means). In this embodiment, the period from the start of the operation of the movable piece 150 in the V round to the elapse of a predetermined time (for example, 2 seconds) after the end of the operation is set as the specific area valid period. The validity period is continued even after the operation of the movable piece 150 is completed. When the game ball passes through the specific area 39 and the game ball is detected by the specific area 39a just before the end of the operation of the movable piece 150, the detection is detected. This is to treat it as valid. Since the operation of the movable piece 150 in the S2702 is based on the short opening operation pattern, it is extremely unlikely that the game ball will be detected by the specific area sensor 39a by the operation.

Next, in S2703, it is determined whether or not the V round (big hit game) being executed is related to the "V-passing scheduled big hit" (S2703). In the case of a big hit scheduled to pass through V, after the first movement of the movable piece 150 (short opening movement pattern) is performed during the V round, the second movement can be executed by the subsequent entry of the game ball into the V attacker. It has become. Therefore, in S2703, when it is determined whether or not the V round being executed is related to the "V-passing planned jackpot" and it is determined that it is not the V-passing scheduled jackpot (NO in S2703), that is, the executing V If the round is related to "V non-passing big hit", this process is completed without processing S2704 and S2705.

On the other hand, when it is determined that the V round being executed is related to the "V-passing scheduled jackpot" (YES in S2703), is the counting value by the ball entry counting means the second predetermined value (c2)? Determine if not (S2704). Here, the counting value (the number of balls entering the V attacker) by the ball entry counting means in the V round is the second predetermined value corresponding to the "number of balls entering the ball that defines the second operation timing" set in S2009. (C2) ”is determined. In this embodiment, since the second predetermined value (c2) is set to "2" (see FIG. 48), if the counting value by the ball entry counting means is "2" (YES in S2704), the processing of S2705 If it is not "2" (NO in S2704), the main process is completed without performing the process of S2705.

Similar to the above-mentioned S2702, the S2705 performs a specific area opening / closing process for opening / closing the specific area 39 by operating the movable piece 150 (S2705). However, since the specific area opening / closing process of S2705 corresponds to the second operation of the movable piece 150 based on the number of balls entering the V attacker being "2", the operation of the movable piece 150 in this case is This is performed in a long opening operation pattern (second operation mode) in which the specific area 39 is opened for 3000 ms (3 seconds) (see FIG. 49). Further, also in S2705, a specific area validity period is set by operating the movable piece 150. As a result, when the specific area 39 is opened by the operation of the movable piece 150 in S2705 and the game ball is detected by the specific area sensor 39a during the specific area valid period, the detection is determined to be valid. On the other hand, if the game ball is detected by the specific area sensor 39a during a period other than the specific area valid period, it is determined that the detection is invalid and that a specific area abnormal passage (specific area error) has occurred (error determination). means).

Here, at the timing when the game ball is detected by the specific area sensor 39a and the V flag is turned ON (the timing when the game ball is detected by the specific area sensor 39a within the valid period), the game status indicator 46 is displayed in a predetermined manner. As an aspect, it is notified that the game state after the end of the big hit game becomes a high probability state. Specifically, the game status indicator 46 is composed of three LEDs of "a1a2a3". Then, in this embodiment, in the normal state (low probability state), the display mode is "a1 □ a2 □ a3 □" (for example, □: off, ■: on). Further, when the game ball is detected by the specific area sensor 39a during the big hit game and the V flag is turned ON, the display mode is "a1 ■ a2 ■ a3 ■". Then, when the big hit game is completed and the game state is set to the high probability state, the display mode is "a1 □ a2 □ a3 □". Further, the lighting control timing of the game status indicator 46 is not limited to such timing, and during the big hit game, even if the game ball passes through the specific area, the display mode of "a1 □ a2 □ a3 □" remains. , "A1 ■ a2 ■ a3 ■" may be displayed at the timing of transition to the high probability state after the end of the big hit game, and "a1 □ a2 □ a3 □" may be displayed at the timing of transition from the high probability state to the low probability state. ..

That is, in the specific area sensor detection process (S207) described later, the V flag is turned on only when the V passage (passage of the game ball to the specific area 39) is detected during the specific area valid period, and the V flag is turned on outside the specific area valid period (V). The V flag is not turned on when V passage is detected (during the invalid period). When the V flag is ON, the probability variation flag is ON. That is, the game state after the big hit game is set to the high probability state (see the game state setting process (S2124) described later). By doing so, the V flag is not turned on based on the passage of V by fraudulent activity, that is, it is prevented from being illegally set to the high probability state.

[Game status setting process]
As shown in FIG. 34, in the game state setting process (S2124), first, it is determined whether or not the V flag is ON (S2201). The V flag is a flag to be turned ON in the specific area sensor detection process (S207) described later. When it is determined in S2201 that the V flag is ON (YES in S2201), the probability change flag is turned ON (S2202), the probability change counter is set (S2203), and the V flag is turned OFF (S2204).

In S2203, a value corresponding to the number of variable games (special symbol winning / failing determination) that can be executed in a high probability state is set in the probability variation counter. In this embodiment, "150" is set.

When it is determined that the V flag is ON in S2201 (YES in S2201) and the processing of S2202 to S2204 is performed, or when it is determined that the V flag is not ON (OFF) in S2201 (N in S2201). Then, the time saving flag is turned ON (S2206), the time saving counter is set (S2207), and this processing is completed.

In S2207, a value corresponding to the number of variable games (special symbol winning / failing determination) that can be executed in the time saving state and the high base state (high frequency state) is set in the time saving counter. The operation period of the time saving function and the high base generation function (also referred to as "time saving period" or "electric support period") is determined by the number of times the special symbol is changed (the number of times the variable game is executed). In this embodiment, the number of times is predetermined according to the type of jackpot.

Specifically, as shown in FIG. 6, in the case of the 7R first, third, fifth, seventh jackpot and the 15R eighth jackpot, that is, in the case of the V-passing scheduled jackpot, it is "150 times". On the other hand, among the jackpots scheduled to pass through V, "50 times" for the 7R 2nd jackpot, "75 times" for the 7R 4th jackpot, and "100 times" for the 7R 6th jackpot and the 15R 9th jackpot. ,. Corresponding to this, in S2207, "50", "75", "100" or "150" is set according to the type of the finished jackpot (this jackpot).

Here, when "150" is set in each of the probability variation counter and the time reduction counter, the high accuracy and high base state is set until the variable game (variation display of the special symbol) is executed 150 times after the jackpot game ends, and the 150th time. When the variable game (disengagement fluctuation) of is completed, the high accuracy high base state ends and the low accuracy low base state is established. If a big hit occurs before the number of executions of the variable game reaches 150 times in the high-accuracy high-base state, the high-accuracy high-base state ends with the occurrence of the big hit.

On the other hand, when the probability variation counter is not set, the end time (end) of the low probability high base state differs depending on the value set in the time reduction counter. That is, when "50" is set in the time reduction counter without setting the probability variation counter, the low accuracy and high base state is reached until the variable game (variation display of the special symbol) is executed 50 times after the jackpot game ends. When the second variable game (disengagement fluctuation) is completed, the low-accuracy high-base state ends and the low-accuracy low-base state is established. If a big hit occurs before the number of executions of the variable game reaches 50 in the low accuracy high base state, the low accuracy high base state ends with the occurrence of the big hit.

In addition, when "75" is set in the time reduction counter without setting the probability variation counter, the low accuracy and high base state is set until the variable game (variation display of the special symbol) is executed 75 times after the jackpot game ends. When the second variable game (disengagement fluctuation) is completed, the low-accuracy high-base state ends and the low-accuracy low-base state is established. If a big hit occurs before the number of executions of the variable game reaches 75 times in the low accuracy high base state, the low accuracy high base state ends with the occurrence of the big hit.

In addition, when "100" is set in the time reduction counter without setting the probability variation counter, the low accuracy and high base state is set until the variable game (variation display of the special symbol) is executed 100 times after the jackpot game ends, and 100. When the second variable game (disengagement fluctuation) is completed, the low-accuracy high-base state ends and the low-accuracy low-base state is established. If a big hit occurs before the number of executions of the variable game reaches 100 in the low accuracy high base state, the low accuracy high base state ends with the occurrence of the big hit.

The time reduction counter and the probability variation counter count the total number of times the fluctuation display number of the first special symbol and the fluctuation display number of the second special symbol are added. The values set in the time reduction counter and the probability variation counter are not limited to this embodiment, and the values can be set in consideration of game playability, ball ejection rate, and the like. Further, for example, "10,000" may be set in the time reduction counter or the probability variation counter. The value of "10,000" (10,000 times) is practically considering the jackpot probability in a high probability state, the business hours of the game store per day, the number of variable games that can be executed during the business hours, and the like. Is the same as guaranteeing a high probability state (high probability high base state) until the next big hit occurs or the business hours end. Therefore, when the game state is set to the high probability state (high probability high base state), it can be said that the high probability state (high probability high base state) is guaranteed until the next big hit occurs (high probability high base state). Substantially synonymous).

The main control unit 80 (game control microcomputer 81) that executes the above game state setting process (S2124) functions as a “game state control means”.

[Specific area sensor detection processing]
As shown in FIG. 11, the game control microcomputer 81 performs the specific area sensor detection process (S207) after the special figure operation process (S206). As shown in FIG. 35, in the specific area sensor detection process (S207), first, it is determined whether or not the game ball is detected by the specific area sensor 39a (S2401). As a result, when it is determined that there is no detection by the specific area sensor 39a (NO in S2401), this process ends without performing the process after S2402. On the other hand, when it is determined that the detection by the specific area sensor 39a has occurred (YES in S2401), it is determined whether or not the detection is in the specific area valid period (S2402).

When it is determined by S2402 that the specific area is valid (YES in S2402), the V flag is turned ON (S2403), the specific area passage command is set in the RAM output buffer (S2404), and this process is performed. To finish. That is, when the game ball that has entered the second large winning opening 35 in the V round (fifth round) passes through the specific area 39 during the valid period of the specific area (when detected by the specific area sensor 39a), this is detected. The V flag is turned on (S2403), and the specific area passage command is set (S2404).

The processing of S2403 and S2404 is the case where the game ball passes through the specific area 39 when the movable piece 150 operates in the short opening operation pattern in the V round of the V-passing scheduled jackpot or the V-non-passing scheduled jackpot, and V. It is executed in any case where the game ball passes through the specific area 39 when the movable piece 150 operates in the long open operation pattern in the V round of the jackpot to be passed. Therefore, in this embodiment, even if an irregular event of passing through V at a V non-passing scheduled jackpot that does not assume V passing occurs, the irregular V passing is treated as an effective V passing.

The specific area passage command set in S2404 is transmitted to the sub-control board 90 at a predetermined timing by the output process (S201). The sub-control board 90 recognizes that V-passage has occurred in the V-round (V-passage has occurred and the V-round has ended) based on the reception of the specific region passage command.

On the other hand, when it is determined by S2402 that the specific area is not in the valid period (NO in S2402), the invalid period passing command is set in the output buffer of the RAM without turning on the V flag (NO in S2402). S2405), this process is completed. That is, when the game ball passes through the specific area 39 in a period other than the specific area valid period (invalid period) (when detected by the specific area sensor 39a), the passage is an abnormal passage in the specific area (specific area error). Yes, an invalid period pass command is set to indicate that. When this invalid period passing command is transmitted to the sub-control board 90 at a predetermined timing by the output process (S201), the sub-control board 90 receives the invalid period passing command based on the received invalid period passing command, and the sub-control board 90 displays the image display device 7 (display). A predetermined error notification is performed using the screen 7a), the frame lamp 66, the board lamp 5, the speaker 67, and the like. The main control unit 80 (game control microcomputer 81) that executes the processing of S2402 that can trigger the set of such invalid period passing commands (S2405) functions as an “error determination means”.

[Non-specific area sensor detection processing]
As shown in FIG. 11, the game control microcomputer 81 performs the non-specific area sensor detection process (S208) after the specific area sensor detection process (S207). As shown in FIG. 36, in the non-specific area sensor detection process (S208), first, it is determined whether or not the game ball is detected by the non-specific area sensor 49a (S2411). As a result, when it is determined that there is no detection by the non-specific area sensor 49a (NO in S2401), this process ends without performing the process after S2412. On the other hand, if it is determined that the non-specific area sensor 49a has detected (YES in S2411), it is determined whether or not the V flag is OFF (S2412), and if it is OFF (YES in S2412), S2413. If it is not OFF (NO in S2412), this process ends without performing the process after S2413. If the V flag is not OFF (NO in S2412), that is, if the V flag is ON, V passage has occurred in the V round, so the processing after S2413 is not performed.

In S2413, it is determined whether or not the number of game balls that have passed through the non-specific area 49 is "9" (S2413). As described above, when the game ball is detected by the non-specific region sensor 49a, the detected number is counted as the number of non-specific region passages by the non-specific region passage counting means (not shown). (Value) is referred to, and it is determined whether or not the number of passages through the non-specific area is “9”. If the number of game balls that have passed through the non-specific area 49 is not "9" (NO in S2413), the main process is completed as it is, and the number of game balls that have passed through the non-specific area 49 is "9". In that case (YES in S2413), the specific area non-passing command is set in the output buffer of the RAM (S2414), and this process ends. In other words, while the game ball enters the V attacker (second prize opening 35) in the V round (fifth round), the V flag is not turned on (V does not pass) and nine (specified number). When the game ball passes through the non-specific area 49 (when nine game balls are detected by the non-specific area sensor 49a), the specific area non-pass command is set (S2414).

The specific area non-passing command set in S2414 is transmitted to the sub-control board 90 at a predetermined timing by the output process (S201). The sub-control board 90 recognizes that V-passage did not occur in the V-round (the V-round ended without V-passage occurring) based on the reception of the specific region non-passage command.

[Processing when starting the ball]
As shown in FIG. 11, the game control microcomputer 81 performs the start-and-ball entry process (S209) after the non-specific area sensor detection process (S208). As shown in FIG. 37, in the start ball entry process (S209), first, the special figure 1 reserved ball number, the special figure 2 reserved ball number, and the normal symbol reserved ball number stored in the RAM of the main control board 80 are read out. (S2501).

Next, in S2502, it is determined whether or not the number of reserved balls in Special Figure 2 has increased by "1" (S2502). As a result, when it is determined that the number of reserved balls in Special Figure 2 has increased by "1" (YES in S2502), the process proceeds to S2503. This corresponds to the case where "1" is added to the number of reserved balls in the special figure 2 in S307 in the start port sensor detection process (S204) based on the game ball entering the second start port 21. On the other hand, when it is determined that the number of reserved balls in Special Figure 2 has not increased (NO in S2502), the process proceeds to S2506 without processing S2503 to S2505.

The S2503 reads out the latest acquired random number value (acquired information) acquired by the special figure 2 related random number acquisition process (S308) in the immediately preceding start port sensor detection process (S204) and stored in the second special figure hold storage unit (acquisition information). S2503). Next, the S2504 determines the acquired random number value related to the read second special symbol (S2504). Specifically, the value of the special symbol hit / miss judgment random number counter (random number value for special symbol hit / fail judgment) acquired at the time of entering the starting port is determined according to the current gaming state (low probability state or high probability state). , Judge whether it is a big hit or a miss. If the determination result (preliminary determination result) is a big hit, the type of the big hit is determined. In the processing of S2504, the hit / fail judgment (judgment of whether or not it is a big hit) regarding the special figure 2 hold is performed prior to the hit / miss judgment (S1303, S1304) in the special figure 2 hit / miss judgment process (S1202) (so-called " It is equivalent to "hold look-ahead").

In the preliminary judgment, the jackpot determination table (see FIG. 8A), that is, the jackpot determination table for the high-probability state in the high-probability state, and the jackpot determination for the normal state in the normal state (low-probability state). Based on the table, it is possible to determine whether or not it matches the jackpot determination value.

As other pre-determination modes, for example, as a variation pattern information determination table capable of determining variation pattern information, a variation pattern information determination table for a normal state (for a low probability state) and a variation pattern information determination table for a high probability state (high probability). It is assumed that it has a fluctuation pattern information judgment table (for state), and fluctuation pattern information is based on the fluctuation pattern information judgment table according to the game state and the acquired random number value (value of the random number counter for judgment of whether or not the special symbol is correct). Can be determined. From this fluctuation pattern information, it is possible to determine in advance whether or not it is a big hit, the type of big hit, and whether or not a game effect with a high expectation of a big hit is executed.

Next, in S2505, game information including at least the reserved ball number data related to the second special symbol read by S2501 and the information pre-determined by S2504 (pre-judgment information) is generated as the special figure 2 start ball entry command. , Set in the output buffer of RAM (S2505). As a special figure 2 start ball entry command, a part or all of the value of the special figure 2 acquisition random number read by S2503 may be transmitted to the sub-control board as it is, or the value of the special figure 2 acquisition random number may be transmitted as it is. Is not transmitted as it is, but game information acquired based on the value of the random number acquired in Special Figure 2 (for example, the above-mentioned fluctuation pattern information) may be transmitted.

The sub-control unit 90 (sub-control board) analyzes the special figure 2 start-in ball command transmitted by the main control unit 80 to determine whether the information is related to a big hit and the number of reserved balls of the second special symbol. It is said that some of the jackpot types can be identified (discriminated). Further, in this embodiment, in addition to this, by analyzing the special figure 2 start entry command, whether or not the acquired special figure 2 acquisition random number becomes a big hit when it is determined in a high probability state, and low. It is possible to specify whether or not it will be a big hit when it is judged in the probability state. As a result, the sub-control unit 90 stores the received special figure 2 start entry command as a hold (effect hold information), predetermines the effect hold information at a specific timing, and determines whether or not the command is successful in a low probability state. It is possible to determine whether or not the effect hold information determined to be a big hit is stored.

From the viewpoint of fraud prevention, among the acquired random number values read by S2503, the random number value for determining whether the special symbol is correct or not is not transmitted to the sub control unit as it is, and the value of the random number counter for determining the other jackpot type (big hit). Command data including information indicating the value (variation pattern random number value) of the type determination random number value and the fluctuation pattern random number counter and the information indicating the result of the preliminary judgment is generated and set as the special figure 2 start entry command. It is possible.

Next, in S2506, it is determined whether or not the number of reserved balls in Special Figure 1 has increased by "1" in the same manner as in the above-described processing according to Special Figure 2 (S2506). As a result, when it is determined that the number of reserved balls in Special Figure 1 has increased by "1" (YES in S2506), the process proceeds to S2507. This corresponds to the case where "1" is added to the number of reserved balls in Special Figure 1 in S311 in the start port sensor detection process (S204) based on the fact that the game ball has entered the first start port. On the other hand, when it is determined that the number of reserved balls in Special Figure 1 has not increased (NO in S2506), this processing is completed without performing the processing after S2507.

In S2507, if it is determined whether or not the time saving flag is ON (S2507), and if it is determined that the time saving flag is ON, that is, it is in a high base state (YES in S2507), the processing after S2508 is not performed. This process is completed. On the other hand, when it is determined that the time saving flag is OFF, that is, it is in the low base state (NO in S2507), the process proceeds to the process related to the preliminary determination after S2508.

Here, when the time saving flag is ON, that is, when the current gaming state is the high base state, the opening extension function that increases the frequency of entering the second starting port 21 is operating, and whether or not the special figure 2 is correct or not. The judgment (the second special symbol hit / miss judgment) is easy to be performed. Further, in this embodiment, the digestion of the special figure 2 hold (variation display of the second special symbol) is executed in preference to the digestion of the special figure 1 hold (variation display of the first special symbol) (so-called "special figure 2"). Priority variable machine "). In such a configuration, for example, the preliminary determination of the special figure 1 is performed in a high base state, the result is notified to the player by an effect such as a notice, and it is clarified that the result of the preliminary determination is a big hit. In this case, the player intentionally eliminates the special figure 2 hold (set to "0") at an arbitrary timing by using the priority of the special figure 2 hold digestion, and the special figure showing the result of the preliminary judgment is shown. Technical intervention such as intentionally generating a jackpot related to 1 is possible. It is not preferable from the viewpoint of fairness of the game that the player can adjust the timing of occurrence of such a big hit. Therefore, when the current gaming state is not a low base state but a high base state (YES in S2507), this process is terminated without performing the process related to the pre-determination of Special Figure 1 after S2508.

The processing of S2508 to S2510 is the same processing as that of S316 to S318 described above for the special figure 1. That is, the latest acquired random number value (acquired information) acquired by the special figure 1 related random number acquisition process (S312) in the start port sensor detection process (S204) and stored in the first special figure hold storage unit is read (S2508). The acquired random number value read out is pre-determined (S2509), and the game information including at least the reserved ball number data related to the first special symbol read out by S2501 and the information pre-determined by S2509 (pre-judgment information) is obtained. Special figure 1 Generated as a start-in ball command and set in the RAM output buffer (S2510). The preliminary determination (hold look-ahead) of S2509 is performed prior to the accuracy determination (S1603, S1604) in the special figure 1 accuracy determination process (S1207).

[Power failure monitoring process]
As shown in FIG. 11, the game control microcomputer 81 performs a power failure monitoring process (S210) after the start / entry process (S209). As shown in FIG. 38, in the power cutoff monitoring process (S210), first, it is determined whether or not a power cutoff signal is input (S2601), and if there is no input (NO in S2601), this process ends. On the other hand, if there is an input of a power off signal (YES in S2601), the current state of the game machine (whether it is in a high probability state, whether it is in a big hit game, the number of reserved balls is some, probable change. Data related to (the number of remaining fluctuations in the time reduction is several, etc.) is stored (backed up) in RAM (S2602), the power off flag is turned ON (S2603), and loop processing is performed without returning to interrupt processing (S105). In the S2602, in addition to the data related to the current state of the gaming machine, it is possible to store (back up) arbitrary data predetermined as a backup target. In this embodiment, since the lighting pattern data that determines the display mode of the hit indicator 48 is the backup target as described above, the S2602 also stores the lighting pattern data related to the display mode.

[Sub-control main processing]
Next, the operation of the effect control microcomputer 91 (control processing by the sub control unit 90) will be described with reference to FIGS. 39 to 47. The counters, flags, statuses, buffers, etc. that appear in the operation description of the effect control microcomputer 91 are provided in the RAM of the sub-control board 90 (sub-control unit). The effect control microcomputer 91 provided on the sub-control board 90 performs the sub-control main processing shown in FIG. 39 when the power of the pachinko gaming machine 1 is turned on (when the power supply by the power board 109 is started). The program is read from the ROM of the sub-control board 90 and executed. As shown in the figure, in the sub-control main process, the CPU initialization process is first performed (S4001). In the CPU initialization process (S4001), stack setting, constant setting, CPU setting, SIO, PIO, CTC (interrupt time controller) and the like are set, and various flags, statuses and counters are reset.

Next, in S4002, it is determined whether or not the power cutoff signal is ON and the contents of the RAM of the sub-control board 90 are normal (S4002). The power off signal is output from the power supply board 109 to the sub-control board 90 when the power of the pachinko gaming machine 1 is turned on. Then, if the determination result of S4002 is NO (NO in S4002), the RAM of the sub-control board 90 is initialized (S4003), and the process proceeds to S4004. On the other hand, if the determination result of S4002 is YES (YES in S4002), the process proceeds to S4004 without initializing the RAM of the sub-control board 90. That is, if the power off signal is not ON, or if the contents of the RAM are not normal even if the power off signal is ON (NO in S4002), the RAM of the sub-control board 90 is initialized, but the power off signal is output. If it is ON and the contents of the RAM are kept normal (YES in S4002), the RAM is not initialized. Initializing the RAM resets the values of various flags, statuses and counters. Note that S4001 to S4003 are executed only once after the power is turned on (when the power is turned on), and are not executed after that. For this reason, the processing of S4001 to S4003 is also referred to as "power-on processing".

Here, when the effect control microcomputer 91 executes the power-on processing (S4001 to S4003), it notifies that the power-on processing is being executed until the power-on processing is completed (power supply). (Notification at the time of turning on) is executed (second notification means). Specifically, a message indicating that the power-on processing is being executed is displayed on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7, and a notification sound indicating that fact is output from the speaker 67 (second notification means). As described above, when the power is turned on, at least the CPU initialization process (S4001) is executed, and if the judgment of S4002 is a negative judgment (NO in S4002), the RAM initialization (S4003) is also executed. If the CPU initialization process (S4001) is executed and the RAM initialization (S4003) is not executed, the message "Power is being restored" is displayed, and the CPU initialization process (S4001) and RAM initialization (S4003) are displayed. When both are executed, the message "Ram clearing" is displayed. These messages are displayed by transmitting a command (power-on command) from the sub-control board 90 to the image control board 100 and processing the CPU (image control microcomputer 101) of the image control board 100 that receives the command. Will be executed. Which of the "power restoration in progress" and "ram clearing" messages is displayed is determined by the content (type) of the command transmitted from the sub-control board 90 to the image control board 100. Further, in this embodiment, one type of notification sound for power-on processing is used, and the sound is output from the speaker 67 via the voice control board 106.

The S4004 disables interrupts. Next, the random number seed update process is executed (S4005). In the random number seed update process (S4005), the values of various random number counters for determining the effect are updated. The updated random number counter values are sequentially stored in a predetermined updated value storage area (not shown) of the RAM of the sub-control board 90. The random number for determining the effect includes a random number for determining the advance effect that determines the advance effect and a random number for determining the effect symbol that determines the effect symbol. The random number update method can be the same as the random number update process performed by the main control board 80 described above. Instead of adding the random numbers one by one at the time of updating, it may be added by two. The random number for determining the effect is acquired at a predetermined timing. As this timing, for example, when a control signal (starting ball entry command) notifying that the starting ball has arrived is transmitted from the main control board 80, or a control signal notifying the start of fluctuation from the main control board 80 ( It can be used when a fluctuation start command) is transmitted, when a fluctuation effect pattern described later is determined, or the like. The storage location of the acquired random number for determining the effect is a predetermined random number counter value storage area (not shown) of the RAM of the sub-control board 90.

When the random number seed update process (S4005) is completed, the command transmission process is executed (S4006). In the command transmission process, various commands (control signals) stored in the output buffer (also referred to as “sub-output buffer”) of the RAM of the sub-control board 90 are transmitted to the image control board 100, the voice control board 106, and the lamp. It is transmitted to the control board 107. Each control board (each control unit) that received the command uses various effect devices (image display device 7, speaker 67, board lamp 5, frame lamp 66, movable decorative member 14, etc.) according to the received command. (Direction design game production, special game production related to big hit game, etc.) is executed.

Next, the S4007 allows the interrupt, and then the S4004 to S4007 are looped. While the interrupt is enabled, the receive interrupt process (S4008), the 2 ms timer interrupt process (S4009), and the 10 ms timer interrupt process (S4010) can be executed. By executing these control processes, display control of the effect symbols and the like executed on the display screen 7a (effect symbol display area 7b) of the image display device 7, lighting control of various lamps, operation control of the movable decorative member, It is possible to control the audio output from the speaker.

[Receive interrupt processing]
As shown in FIG. 40, in the reception interrupt processing (S4008), first, whether or not the strobe signal (STB signal) is ON, that is, the strobe signal sent from the main control board 80 is the external INT of the effect control microcomputer 91. It is determined whether or not the signal has been input to the input unit (S4101). As a result, when it is determined that the strobe signal is not ON (NO in S4101), this processing is completed without performing the processing of S4102. On the other hand, when it is determined that the strobe signal is ON (YES in S4101), various commands transmitted from the main control board 80 are stored in the RAM of the sub control board 90 (S4102), and this process is completed. This receive interrupt process (S4008) is a process that is executed in preference to other interrupt processes (S4009, S4010).

[2ms timer interrupt processing]
The 2 ms timer interrupt process (S4009) is a process executed every time an interrupt pulse having a cycle of 2 msec is input to the sub-control board 90. As shown in FIG. 41, in the 2 ms timer interrupt process (S4009), first, an input process for creating switch data (edge data and level data) is performed based on the detection signals from the effect button detection switches 63c and 63d (S4201). .. This switch data indicates whether or not there is an operation (ON, OFF) for each of the first effect button 63a and the second effect button 63b, and is used to execute an operation-compatible effect based on the operation of the effect button 63. is there. Next, a lamp data output process for outputting lamp data for causing lamps such as a frame lamp 66 and a board lamp 5 to emit light to a predetermined drive circuit (not shown) via a lamp control board 107 (see FIG. 5). Drive data for outputting (S4202) and drive data for driving the movable decorative member 14 (electrical drive source) to a predetermined drive circuit (not shown) via the lamp control board 107 (see FIG. 5). Performs output processing (S4203). The lamp data and the drive data are created by the 10 ms timer interrupt process described later. Then, the watchdog timer process for resetting the watchdog timer is performed (S4204).

[10ms timer interrupt processing]
The 10 ms timer interrupt process (S4010) is a process executed every time an interrupt pulse having a cycle of 10 msec is input to the sub-control board 90. As shown in FIG. 42, in the 10 ms timer interrupt process (S4010), first, the receive command analysis process (S4302) described later is performed. Next, a switch state acquisition process is performed in which the switch data created by the 2 ms timer interrupt process is stored in the RAM of the sub-control board 90 as switch data for the 10 ms timer interrupt process (S4303), and the switch data stored in the switch state acquisition process is performed. (S4304), a switch process is performed to set the display content (for example, operation-compatible effect) of the display screen 7a based on the above.

Next, the movable effect-related processing (S4305) described later is performed. After that, other processing such as creating lamp data (data for controlling the lighting of the board lamp 5 and the frame lamp 66) and updating the random number for determining the effect is performed (S4306), and this processing is completed.

[Received command analysis processing]
As shown in FIG. 43, in the reception command analysis process (S4302), it is first determined whether or not the start ball entry command has been received from the main control board 80 (S4395), and it is determined that the start ball entry command has not been received. If (NO in S4395), the process shifts to S4401 processing, and if it is determined that the start entry command has been received (YES in S4395), the effect hold information storage process (S4400) is performed and the process shifts to S4401 processing. ..

The effect hold information storage process (S4400) is a random operation for determining the jackpot type (preliminary judgment result, jackpot type determination) included in the start-in ball command (special figure 1 start-in ball command or special figure 2 start-in ball command) received in S4395. Game information such as numerical values and fluctuation pattern random values) is set according to the type of special symbol (first special symbol, second special symbol) and the number of special symbol reserved balls when sending and receiving the start entry command (at the time of command generation). , The sub-control board 90 is stored in the predetermined effect hold information storage area of the RAM in the shift memory format. For example, when the received start-in ball command is the special figure 1 start-in ball command corresponding to the number of reserved balls "4" in the special figure 1, the pre-judgment result and the hit type included in the special figure 1 start-in ball command. Etc. are stored as special figure 1 effect hold information in the area corresponding to the number of holds 4 in the special figure 1 effect hold information storage area. The effect hold information stored in this way is used for executing various effects such as a variable effect, a notice effect, and an effect mode, which will be described later. The storage content (effect hold information) of the effect hold information storage area in the sub control board 90 is the special figure hold storage unit (first special figure hold storage unit, second special figure) in the main control board (main control unit) 80 described above. It matches the stored contents (acquired information) of the hold storage unit). From this, it can be said that the effect holding information storage area of the sub-control board 90 is also a “acquisition information storage means”.

The S4401 determines whether or not a fluctuation start command has been received from the main control board 80 (S4401). As a result, when it is determined that the variation start command has been received (YES in S4401), the variation effect start process (S4402) described later is performed to shift to the process of S4406, and it is determined that the variation start command has not been received. In the case (NO in S4401), the process shifts to the processing of S4406 without performing the variation effect start processing (S4402).

The S4406 determines whether or not a fluctuation stop command has been received from the main control board 80 (S4406). As a result, when it is determined that the fluctuation stop command has been received (YES in S4406), the fluctuation production end processing (S4407) is performed, the process shifts to the processing of S4408, and it is determined that the fluctuation stop command has not been received (S4406). S4406 is NO), and the process shifts to S4408 without performing the variable effect end processing (S4407).

In the variation effect end process (S4407), a variation effect end command for stopping and displaying the effect symbol 8 and ending the variation effect is set in the sub-output buffer. When the set variable effect end command is transmitted to the image control board 100 by the command transmission process (S4006), the image control microcomputer 101 changes the effect symbol 8 displayed on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7. The stop display is displayed, and the variable effect (effect pattern game effect) is ended. It can be said that the effect control microcomputer 91 that executes the variable effect start process (S4402) and the variable effect end process (S4404) also functions as a “variable game execution means”.

Next, S4408 determines whether or not an opening command has been received from the main control board 80 (S4408). As a result, when it is determined that the opening command has been received (YES in S4408), the special game effect selection process for selecting (setting) the effect pattern (effect mode) of the special game effect to be executed in the special game (big hit game). (S4409) is performed, and the process proceeds to S4410. On the other hand, when it is determined that the opening command has not been received (NO in S4408), the process proceeds to the process of S4410 without performing the special game effect selection process (S4409).

Here, the special game production (big hit game production) includes at least an opening production to be executed during the opening period before the opening of the big winning opening (before the start of the first round) accompanying the start of the special game, and a special game (big hit game). Includes a round effect to be executed in the constituent round games.

In this embodiment, an opening command according to the type of jackpot is transmitted from the main control board 80, and the opening command causes an opening effect, a round effect, etc. according to the type of jackpot to be started this time. Be identified. Then, in the special game effect selection process (S4409), the effect pattern of the selected special game effect (opening effect, round effect, etc.) and the information based on the received opening command (type of opening command, jackpot game at the start timing) are selected. Set a special game start command that can specify the jackpot type, etc. in the sub output buffer. When the set special game start command is transmitted to the image control board 100 by the command transmission process (S4006), the image control microcomputer 101 displays an image of the corresponding special game effect according to the progress of the jackpot game. This is executed on the display screen 7a of the device 7.

The opening effect of this embodiment includes an opening effect that does not include a movable effect and an opening effect that includes a movable effect. In the special game effect selection process (S4409), any one of them is included. The opening effect (opening effect pattern) of is selected. Details of the opening production will be described later.

Next, the S4410 determines whether or not an ending command has been received from the main control board 80 (S4410). As a result, when it is determined that the ending command has been received (YES in S4410), the ending effect selection process (S4411) for selecting the effect pattern of the effect at the end of the special game (ending effect), the effect mode after the end of the special game, etc. is performed. Then, the process proceeds to the process of S4413 shown in FIG. On the other hand, when it is determined that the ending command has not been received (NO in S4410), the process proceeds to the process of S4413 without performing the ending effect selection process (S4411).

In this embodiment, the ending command according to the jackpot type and the presence / absence of V passage related to the jackpot this time is transmitted from the main control board 80, and the ending command, the effect mode after the jackpot game, etc. Is identified. Then, in the ending effect selection process (S4411), the effect pattern of the selected ending effect, the information based on the received ending command (type of ending command, type of jackpot related to the finished jackpot game, effect mode after the jackpot game, etc. ) Is set in the sub output buffer at the end of the special game. When the set special game end command is transmitted to the image control board 100 by the command transmission process (S4006), the image control microcomputer 101 displays the ending effect and the like related to the end of the big hit game on the display screen of the image display device 7. Execute on 7a.

Next, S4413 determines whether or not a specific area passage command has been received from the main control board 80 (S4413). As a result, when it is determined that the specific area passage command has not been received (NO in S4413), the process shifts to the processing of S4418 without performing the processing of S4415, and it is determined that the specific area passage command has been received (in S4413). YES), set the V-pass specification command in the sub-output buffer (S4415).

When the V-passage designation command set in S4415 is transmitted to the image control board 100 by the command transmission process (S4006), the image control microcomputer 101 sends image data for notifying that the V-passage has occurred to the image control board. It is read from the ROM of 100, and the V passage notification effect based on the read image data is executed on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7. Examples of the V-passage notification effect include displaying a character image of "V" on the display screen 7a and outputting a sound effect indicating V-passage. Although the possibility is extremely low, the V-passing designation command is set (S4415) and the V-passing notification effect is executed even when the V-passing is performed at the 15R 9th jackpot, which is the V-passing scheduled jackpot.

Next, the S4418 determines whether or not a round start command has been received from the main control board 80 (S4418). As a result, if it is determined that the round start command has not been received (NO in S4418), the process proceeds to S4420 without processing S4419. On the other hand, when it is determined that the round start command has been received (YES in S4418), the round specification command corresponding to the received round start command is set in the sub-output buffer (S4419), and the process proceeds to S4420.

The round start command transmitted from the main control board 80 includes information that can specify the number of rounds to be started (start round), and the CPU (effect control) of the sub control board 90. The microcomputer 91) specifies the number of rounds of the start round based on the received round start command, and sets a round designation command indicating the number of rounds in the sub-output buffer. When the round designation command is transmitted to the image control board 100 by the command transmission process (S4006), the image control microcomputer 101 conforms to the jackpot game being executed according to the number of rounds specified based on the round designation command. The round effect is executed on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7.

Finally, in S4420, other processing related to the effect control is performed (S4420), and this processing is completed. As other processing performed by the S4420, processing based on a reception command other than the above-mentioned command (for example, a normal symbol fluctuation start command, a normal symbol fluctuation stop command, an invalid period passing command, a specific area non-passing command, etc.) is performed.

[Variation production start processing]
Next, the variation effect start process (S4402) executed based on the reception of the variation start command from the main control board 80 in the reception command analysis process (S4302) will be described. As shown in FIG. 45, in the variation effect start process (S4402), first, various effect determination random numbers such as a variation effect determination random number, a notice effect determination random number, an effect symbol determination random number, and a specific effect determination random number are acquired. Performs random number processing for determining the effect (S4501). In this embodiment, the processing of S4501 is performed at the timing when the fluctuation start command is received from the main control unit 80, and a predetermined value (acquisition information) is acquired from each random number. Based on the acquired values, the variable effect to be executed, the advance notice effect, the effect symbol to be stopped and displayed, and the like are determined. The variable effect means an effect executed in association with the variable display (variable game) from the start of the variable display to the end (stop display) of the special symbol, and the effect symbol game effect (effect symbol). (8) Variable display and stop display), as well as movable effects, sound effects, light effects, etc. can be regarded as variable effects.

Next, the S4502 analyzes the fluctuation start command received by the S4401 described above (S4502). The variation start command includes a variation pattern specification command (information for specifying the variation pattern) that specifies the variation pattern selected in the variation pattern selection process of the first special symbol or the second special symbol. The variation pattern specification command includes, for example, variation pattern information (P1 to P22) shown in FIG. 9, game state information for designating the current gaming state, and a determination result of the first special symbol winning / failing determination or the second special symbol winning / failing determination. The determination result information to be designated, the symbol information to specify the jackpot type (big hit symbol), and the like are included (see FIG. 8). In addition, there are two types of variable pattern designation commands, one corresponding to the first special symbol and the other corresponding to the second special symbol. By analyzing the variable pattern designation command, the effect symbol game effect (variable effect) to be started this time is performed. ) Is related to the special figure 1 or the special figure 2.) Can be determined. The variation pattern information, game state information, symbol information, etc. included in the variation pattern designation command can be used in other processes other than the variation effect start process to be executed thereafter.

The S4503 then refers to the current mode status (S4503). The mode status is for determining the effect mode to be executed. The mode status is any value from "1" to "5", and each value is assigned to the effect modes A to E. Specifically, the mode status "1" corresponds to the production mode A, the mode status "2" corresponds to the production mode B, the mode status "3" corresponds to the production mode C, and the mode status "4" corresponds to the production mode C. It corresponds to the production mode D, and the mode status "5" corresponds to the production mode E. By referring to the current mode status, it is possible to specify the current production mode.

Here, the effect mode is an effect environment (effect format) when the variable game is executed, and if the effect mode is different, the background of the display screen 7a, the variable effect, the reach effect, the advance notice effect, etc. are various. Part or all of the production mode of the production is different. Specifically, for example, an image displayed on the image display device 7 (for example, a display mode (for example, a symbol design, a numerical design, etc.) of the effect symbol 8 is different, a character, an item, a background image, etc. appearing are different, etc. The effect display) is different depending on the effect mode. Further, when a plurality of game effects (reach effect, notice effect, etc.) are provided, different game effects may be executed depending on the effect mode.

In this embodiment, one of the effect modes A, B, and C is set when the game state is controlled to the low accuracy low base state, and the effect mode D is set when the game state is controlled to the low accuracy high base state. The effect mode E is set when it is set and controlled to the high accuracy and high base state. Therefore, by confirming the effect mode, the player can grasp whether the current gaming state is the low accuracy low base state, the low accuracy high base state, or the high accuracy high base state. Even if you check the production mode, it is difficult to grasp whether the current game state is the low probability high base state or the high probability high base state (probability change or not) (substantially impossible). An effect mode (probability non-notification mode) may be provided.

Whether the production mode in the low accuracy low base state is "A", "B", or "C" (mode status is "1", "2", "3") is, for example, for selecting the production mode. It can be selected (determined) by a lottery (random number lottery) using the random numbers of. Further, when the effect mode is changed between the effect modes A to C, for example, the number of times the variable game is executed (the number of symbol variations) in one effect mode reaches a predetermined number, or the effect mode change lottery is performed. It can be performed when a predetermined effect mode change condition is satisfied, such as winning a (random number lottery). In addition, the effect mode D is set with the transition to the low accuracy high base state after the big hit game related to the V non-passing planned jackpot, and the high accuracy high base state after the big hit game related to the V passing scheduled big hit is set. The effect mode E is set when the transition occurs. Then, when the variable game (disengagement fluctuation) is executed a predetermined number of times (150 times in this example) without a big hit in the effect mode E (high accuracy high base state), the variable game is used as the high accuracy high base. Since the state ends and the state shifts to the low accuracy and low base state, any one of the effect modes A to C (for example, the effect mode A) is set with this as an opportunity. Since the pachinko gaming machine 1 of this embodiment is a so-called "ST machine", the effect mode E (high accuracy and high base state) is also referred to as "ST mode".

Next, in the S4504, a variable effect pattern determination table (not shown) for determining an effect pattern (also referred to as “variable effect pattern”) of the variable effect performed by using the image display device 7, the board lamp 5, the movable decorative member 14, and the like is set. (S4504). Specifically, the variation effect pattern determination table to be used is set based on the mode status (current effect mode) referred to in S4503 and the variation pattern specification command received from the main control unit 80. For example, when the fluctuation pattern information specified by the received fluctuation pattern specification command is "P1 (variation pattern P1)" (see FIG. 9), the fluctuation effect pattern determination table is used as the variation effect pattern determination table, and the jackpot variation corresponding to the current effect mode The production pattern determination table is set. In this embodiment, a plurality of variable effect pattern determination tables corresponding to the effect mode (mode status) are stored in the ROM of the sub-control board 90 in advance. Therefore, in the S4504, the variable effect pattern determination tables are selected from the table. The table corresponding to the mode status (current production mode) referenced in S4503 is selected and set. The variable effect pattern determination table is mainly for determining the execution mode (variable mode of the effect symbol, etc.) of the effect symbol game effect, and a plurality of variable effect pattern determination tables are stored in advance in the ROM of the sub-control board 90. Has been done. In S4504, one of the plurality of variable effect pattern determination tables is set.

Next, in S4505, a variation effect pattern suitable for the specified variation pattern is selected and set based on the variation effect determination random number acquired in S4501 and the variation effect pattern determination table set in S4504 (S4505). The variable effect pattern mainly includes the execution period of the variable effect (also referred to as “variable period” or “variable effect time”) and the variation mode of the effect symbol 8 displayed in the effect symbol display area 7b (effect symbol game). Execution mode of the effect) and the like are set. As a result, in the effect symbol game effect (variable effect), the case where the reach effect is executed within the variable period (variable effect with reach), the case where the reach effect is not executed (normal variable effect), and the like are determined. Further, the variable effect pattern includes, in addition to the variable mode of the effect symbol 8, execution modes such as a display effect, a sound effect, a light effect, and a movable effect that are executed in association with the variable display of the effect symbol 8. Whether or not to execute the production is also decided.

In addition, the reach effect is, for example, as a display mode of the effect symbol 8 when the result of the special symbol hit / fail determination is a big hit, all three effect symbols 8L, 8C, 8R are the same (doublet). When the mode (big hit mode, specific mode) is provided, two of the three effect symbols 8L, 8C, 8R (for example, the first stop symbol and the second stop symbol) constitute the jackpot mode. (Also referred to as "reach symbol" or "reach mode"), the stop display (temporary stop) is performed, and the remaining one (for example, the third stop symbol) continues to be displayed in a variable manner (also referred to as "reach state"). Then, it means an effect indicating whether or not the remaining one effect symbol is stopped and displayed with a symbol that completes the jackpot mode. According to this reach production, it is possible to effectively fuel the expectations of the player aiming for a big hit.

Here, as shown in FIG. 51 (A), the variation effect pattern of the present embodiment is roughly classified into an deviation variation effect pattern corresponding to the deviation variation and a jackpot variation effect pattern corresponding to the jackpot variation. In this embodiment, the deviation variation effect pattern and the jackpot variation effect pattern are further classified according to the presence or absence of the reach effect and the movable effect, respectively. Specifically, the deviation variation effect patterns include a first deviation variation effect pattern that does not include either a reach effect or a movable effect, a second deviation variation effect pattern that includes a reach effect and does not include a movable effect, and a reach effect and a movable effect. It is classified into three types: the third deviation effect pattern including both of the above. Further, the jackpot variation effect pattern is classified into two types: a first jackpot variation effect pattern that includes a reach effect and does not include a movable effect, and a second jackpot variation effect pattern that includes both a reach effect and a movable effect.

The variation effect pattern set (selected) in S4505 belongs to (corresponds to) at least one of the first to third out-of-range variation effect patterns and the first and second jackpot variation effect patterns. Since there are a plurality of reach production patterns such as a normal reach production and a super reach production as described later, the variable production pattern including the reach production (other than the first deviation variable production pattern) is included in the reach production pattern. It is further classified according to it. Further, there are a plurality of types of variation effect patterns belonging to the first deviation effect pattern, the variation effect pattern belonging to the second deviation variation effect pattern, and the variation effect pattern belonging to the third deviation variation effect pattern. It may be. This also applies to the first and second jackpot fluctuation effect patterns.

Further, in S4505, the effect symbol 8 (also referred to as “stop effect symbol”) to be stopped and displayed is determined and set based on the random number for determining the effect symbol acquired in S4501 and the stop symbol determination table (not shown). There are two types of stop display: temporary stop display (temporary stop) and fixed stop display (fixed stop). Temporary stop means that the scroll display (variable display) of the effect symbol is temporarily stopped (paused), and the effect symbol is placed at a predetermined stop position (for example, the effect symbol display area 7b) on the display screen, such as a number or a character. It means that it is displayed in a state where it is slightly moved so that it can be recognized. The state of slight movement is also called "sway fluctuation". On the other hand, the fixed stop means that the scroll display (variable display) of the effect symbol ends, and the effect symbol recognizes the number, the character, or the like at a predetermined stop position (for example, the effect symbol display area 7b) on the display screen. It means that it is completely stopped and displayed when it can be done. When the effect symbol is fixedly stopped after the variable display, the display result of the variable display (result of the variable effect) is definitively displayed (confirmed display) (derivative display). Therefore, the temporary stop of the effect symbol can be executed once or a plurality of times until the final stop is reached.

The stop effect symbols determined (selected) by S4505 are a symbol that temporarily stops (also referred to as a "temporary stop symbol") and a symbol that is fixedly stopped (also referred to as a "fixed stop symbol"). Specifically, the effect symbol 8 that is stopped and displayed (fixed stop) as a result of the variable effect, that is, the fixed stop symbol, is "787" or the like in the case where the result of the special symbol hit / miss judgment is wrong and there is reach. One of the three production symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R is considered to be different from the other production symbols (reach out-of-reach), and when there is no reach, three productions such as "635" At least one of the symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R is regarded as a disjointed pattern (complete disjoint pattern) in which the other effect symbols are different. On the other hand, if the result of the special symbol hit / fail judgment is a big hit and any of the 7R 1st to 7th big hits and the 15R 9th big hit, it is doublet other than "777", and if it is a 15R 8th big hit It is doublet of "777". As a result, with respect to the 7R jackpot, it is impossible to determine whether the jackpot is a V-passing scheduled jackpot or a V-non-passing scheduled jackpot only by the stop display mode of the effect symbol 8. Further, regarding the 15R 8th jackpot and the 15R 9th jackpot, it is possible to determine whether the jackpot is a V-passing scheduled jackpot or a V-non-passing scheduled jackpot through the stop display mode of the effect symbol 8.

The stop display mode (stop effect symbol) of the effect symbol 8 shown in this embodiment is merely an example, and what is stopped and displayed as the stop effect symbol can be appropriately set. Further, regarding the 7R jackpot, it may be possible to determine whether it is a V-passing scheduled jackpot or a V-non-passing scheduled jackpot through the stop display mode of the effect symbol 8, and the 15R 8th jackpot and the 15R 9th jackpot may be determined. Regarding the big hit, it may be impossible to determine whether it is a V-passing scheduled big hit or a V-non-passing scheduled big hit through the stop display mode of the effect symbol 8. Further, for all the jackpots, it may or may not be possible to determine whether the jackpot is a V-passing scheduled jackpot or a V-non-passing scheduled jackpot through the stop display mode of the effect symbol 8. Good.

In addition, the effect symbol 8, that is, the temporary stop symbol, which is temporarily stopped in the middle of the fluctuation display before reaching the fixed stop, is basically a roll (reach out-of-reach, complete) other than the above-mentioned doublet (big hit mode). It is said to be doublet, etc.). However, for example, in the case of a variable effect pattern in which a so-called "re-lottery" is executed in which the effect symbol 8 is stopped at doublet and then displayed in a variable manner again, the temporary stop symbol is doublet (big hit mode). In this case, the temporary stop symbol is a roll corresponding to a jackpot having a relatively low degree of advantage (for example, a jackpot scheduled to pass through 15RV, which has a lower degree of advantage than a jackpot scheduled to pass through 15RV). Further, the fixed stop symbol after the re-lottery can be again set as a roll corresponding to a jackpot having a relatively low degree of advantage, or a roll corresponding to a jackpot having a relatively high degree of advantage. Further, since the effect symbol 8 is temporarily stopped immediately before (immediately before) the final stop after the variable display ends, the effect symbol 8 that temporarily stops immediately before the final stop is also a temporary stop symbol, but in this case, it is provisional. The stop symbol is the same as the fixed stop symbol.

In the pachinko game machine 1 of the present embodiment, as the variation mode (variation effect pattern) of the effect symbol 8, reach A, reach B, reach C, super reach (also referred to as “SP reach”) A, super reach B, Super reach C and the like are set. In S4505, which of these effects is to be performed or which of these effects is not to be performed (this is also referred to as "normal variation") is determined based on the variation effect pattern determination table.

Then, for example, when the variation effect with reach is executed, one of the reach effects is set based on the variation pattern designation command and the variation effect pattern determination table. Here, when the super reach effect (any of SP reach A to C) is executed, there is a possibility of a big hit as compared with the case where the normal reach effect (any of reach A to C) is executed. Is set to be high. That is, it can be said that the super reach production is a game production with a higher possibility of becoming a big hit (expectation of big hit) as compared with the normal reach production. Further, when the reach effect is executed and the movable effect is executed, it is set so that the possibility of a big hit is higher than the case where the reach effect is executed without executing the movable effect. ing. That is, it can be said that the reach effect with the movable effect is a game effect with a higher possibility of becoming a big hit (expectation of big hit) as compared with the reach effect without the movable effect.

In this embodiment, when the sub-control board 90 receives a variation pattern specification command for specifying a variation pattern (see FIG. 9) having a variation time of 30,000 ms or more as a variation pattern specification command from the main control board 80, the present embodiment corresponds to the command. Reach effects (variable effects with reach) can be set (executed) based on commands. Among them, when the fluctuation time is 30,000 ms, the normal reach effect is set (executed) as the reach effect (normal reach variation effect), and when the fluctuation time is 45,000 ms or more, the SP reach effect is set (executed) as the reach effect. (SP reach fluctuation production). In this embodiment, three types of normal reach of reach A to C and three types of super reach of SP reach A to C are provided as the types of reach effect, but the type (number) of reach effect is this. It is not limited to, and may be provided with more reach effects.

Here, the variable display of the effect symbol 8 is basically performed as follows. That is, after the three effect symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R start the fluctuation display, the fluctuation speed of all the symbols becomes substantially constant at high speed, and then, when a predetermined time (for example, 9 seconds) elapses, the first stop symbol The fluctuation speed of the left effect symbol (8L in this example) decreases, and the first stop symbol stops (temporarily stops). Following this, the fluctuation speed of the second stop symbol (right effect symbol 8R in this example) decreases, the second stop symbol stops (temporarily stops), and finally the third stop symbol (medium effect symbol 8C in this example). The fluctuation speed of is reduced and the third stop symbol is stopped (temporarily stopped). After that, when the three effect symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R are fixedly stopped, the display result of the variation display is derived and displayed, and one variation display ends with this. Based on the flow from the start to the end of such fluctuation display, normal fluctuation and reach production are performed.

For example, when the variable time shortening function of the special symbol according to the number of reserved balls of the special symbol or the game state is not activated (when the variable time shortening function is not activated), the three effect symbols 8L, 8C, 8R display the variable. When started, the left effect symbol 8L (first stop symbol) is stopped (temporarily stopped) at the timing when a predetermined time (for example, 9 seconds) elapses from the start of the fluctuation, and then the right effect symbol 8R (second stop) is stopped. The symbol) stops (temporarily stops). At this time, if the left and right effect symbols 8L and 8R are stopped (temporarily stopped) with the symbols having the same number (reach mode), the reach is established, and then the reach effect is developed. In the reach effect, if the reach effect is normal reach, the effect image corresponding to the normal reach is displayed on the display screen 7a, and if the reach effect is SP reach, the effect image corresponding to the SP reach is displayed on the display screen 7a.

On the other hand, if the reach is not established (that is, if it is a normal fluctuation), the right effect symbol 8R (second stop symbol) is stopped (temporarily stopped), and then the middle effect symbol 8C (third stop symbol) is stopped (third stop symbol). Temporary stop). In this embodiment, it takes about 11 seconds from the start of fluctuation of the effect symbol 8 to the stop (temporary stop) of the third stop symbol (medium effect symbol 8C in this example) in the normal variation. However, in the normal fluctuation when the fluctuation time shortening function of the special symbol is activated, the time required from the start of the fluctuation display to the stop (temporary stop) of the left effect symbol 8L (first stop symbol) is normal (variation). It is shorter than (when the time reduction function is not activated), and along with this, the time required for the right effect symbol 8R (second stop symbol) and the middle effect symbol 8C (third stop symbol) to stop (temporarily stop) also increases. It gets shorter.

Depending on the variable effect pattern set in S4505 and the advance notice effect pattern set in S4506 described later, for example, after the start of the variable display of the effect symbol 8, the three effect symbols 8L, 8C, 8R are at the same time. The order and timing of the stop display of the effect symbols, such as stopping (temporarily stopping) all at once, or all the symbols continue to fluctuate even after the predetermined time (for example, 9 seconds) until the first stop symbol stops. Etc. may differ from the above-described aspects.

Next, in S4506, processing related to the setting of the advance notice effect (notice effect setting process) is performed (S4506). The advance notice effect is an effect that suggests a variable display currently being executed or a stored hold (variable display to be executed later). For example, the display result of the variable display currently being executed is It is an effect that suggests the possibility of becoming a big hit mode, or suggests that the display result of the variable display executed later may be a big hit mode. The advance notice production is also called "suggestion production". In this embodiment, the advance notice effect (also referred to as "hold look-ahead advance notice") based on the effect hold information (preliminary judgment result) stored in the S4400 and the current (this time) change display (also referred to as "the change") are displayed. Since various notice effects such as the notice effect (also referred to as "the change notice") can be executed, the S4506 can determine whether or not to execute each notice effect (whether or not to execute). Set the execution pattern (notice effect pattern) of the advance notice effect to be executed. Specifically, based on the random number for determining the advance notice effect acquired in S4501 and the advance notice effect determination table (not shown) stored in the ROM of the sub-control board 90, the presence / absence of execution of the advance notice effect and the advance notice effect pattern are determined. A decision is made, and a notice effect pattern is set based on the decision result. The notice effect (suggestion effect) is, for example, to display an image (also referred to as "notice image" or "suggestion image") suggesting the degree of expectation of a big hit on the display screen 7a (also referred to as "notice display" or "suggestion display"). It is done by. In addition to such display effects (notice display, suggestion display), the advance notice effect can also be performed by sound effect, light effect, and movable effect, and can also be performed by combining these effects. ..

The storage content of the production hold information stored in the S4400 (the storage content of the production hold information storage area) and the result of the special symbol hit / fail judgment specified by the analysis result of the fluctuation start command in the S4502 (for this special symbol fluctuation display). The notice effect pattern set in S4506, that is, based on the fluctuation pattern information of the special symbol (variation pattern and stop symbol related to the special symbol fluctuation display this time), which is also specified by the analysis result of the fluctuation start command). , The type (notice type) and mode of the advance notice effect to be executed, the presence or absence of the advance notice effect, and the like are different. When executing a notice effect, one of the multiple notice effects (one type of notice effect) may be executed, or two or more notice effects (multiple types of notice effects) may be executed. That is, a plurality of types of advance notice effects may be executed at each execution timing during one variation display (during the variation effect).

Next, in S4507, a variation effect start command for starting variation effect etc. based on the variation effect pattern set in S4505 and the advance notice effect pattern set in S4506 is set in the sub-output buffer (S4507), and the variation effect start process is performed. Finish. When the variation effect start command set in S4507 is transmitted to the image control board 100 by the command transmission process (S4006), the image control microcomputer 101 determines the variation effect pattern specified based on the variation effect start command, that is, S4505. Predetermined image data for fluctuation effect (image data constituting the change start, change in progress, change stop, etc. of the effect symbol 8) corresponding to the variation effect pattern set in, and the advance notice effect specified based on the variation effect start command. The pattern, that is, the predetermined advance notice effect image data corresponding to the advance notice effect pattern set in S4506 is read from the ROM of the image control board 100, and the variation effect and the advance notice effect based on the read image data are displayed on the image display device 7. Execute on the display screen 7a. In addition, the variable display (blinking display) by the two LEDs on the effect display 102 is also executed. Further, in accordance with the execution of the variable effect, each effect such as a sound effect, a light effect, and a movable effect is executed via the voice control board 106 and the lamp control board 107.

In the RAM of the sub control unit 90 (microcomputer 91 for effect control), the execution period (variable period) of the variable effect and each effect such as reach effect and movable effect during the variable period (also referred to as “in-period effect”). ) Is executed, the execution period of the effect within the period, and the operation valid period described later when the operation of the effect button 63 (first effect button 63a or second effect button 63b) is enabled during the variable period. A timer is provided to manage (monitor, measure) the period (time) related to the production. Based on this timer, the sub-control unit 90 (effect control microcomputer 91) is configured to be able to control the start and end of various effects execution periods, operation valid periods, and the like.

[Movable production related processing]
Next, the movable effect-related processing (S4305) executed by the 10ms timer interrupt processing (S4010) will be described. This process is related to the operation (movable effect) of the movable decorative member 14.

As shown in FIG. 46, in the movable effect-related processing (S4305), first, it is determined whether or not the first operating condition is satisfied (S4701). As described above, the first operating condition is a condition that triggers the execution of the first operating mode in which the movable decorative member 14 at the start point position (first state) is moved (raised) to the end point position.

For example, when a variable effect pattern (third out-of-range variable effect pattern or second big hit variable effect pattern) including a movable effect is selected (set) in the above-mentioned S4505, the variable effect during the variable effect based on the variable effect pattern is performed in advance. At the predetermined operation start timing, the movable decorative member 14 at the starting point position operates in the first operation mode. In addition, when an opening effect pattern including a movable effect is selected (set) in the opening effect selection process (S4900) described later, when a predetermined operation start timing during the opening effect based on the opening effect pattern is reached, The movable decorative member 14 at the starting point position operates in the first operating mode.

In the S4701, it is determined that the first operating condition is satisfied when the operation start timing as described above arrives when the movable decorative member 14 is in the starting point position. The operation start timing of the movable decorative member 14 can be appropriately set (included in the effect pattern) in the effect pattern.

Further, the determination of whether or not the movable decorative member 14 is in the start point position (non-operating state) is determined by, for example, a sensor capable of detecting that the movable decorative member 14 is in the start point position (“start point position detecting means” or “first point position detecting means” or “first point position detecting means”. (1) Position detecting means ”) is provided, and the detection signal can be input to the sub-control board 90 and performed based on the detection signal (position determination means). When the movable decorative member 14 is not in the start point position (non-operating state) when the operation start timing of the movable decorative member 14 (the timing at which the first operating condition is satisfied) arrives (for example, the detection signal of the start point position detecting means is OFF). In the case), the movable decorative member 14 is prevented from being operated in the first operation mode, and the notification by the notification image 500 described later (a set of operation notification commands described later) is not performed. This is because the normal operation of the movable decorative member 14 cannot be guaranteed, which may lead to a failure or breakage of the movable decorative member 14. In such a case, a process (return process) for returning the movable decorative member 14 to the start point position (non-operating state) is performed, and as a result, it is confirmed that the movable decorative member 14 is in the starting point position (non-operating state). If possible, the movable effect can be executed thereafter. On the other hand, if it cannot be confirmed that the movable decorative member 14 is in the start point position (non-operating state) even after the return processing is performed, an error occurs due to the board lamp 5, the image display device 7 (display screen 7a), or the like. It is configured to perform notification. As a result, it is possible to notify the outside that a defect (trouble) has occurred in the movable decorative member 14 (a type of information regarding the movable effect means).

When it is determined that the first operating condition is satisfied in S4701 (YES in S4701), the first drive data for operating the movable decorative member 14 in the first operating mode is set in the sub output buffer (S4703), and the movable decoration is made. An operation notification command for notifying the operation of the member 14 is set in the sub output buffer (S4705). On the other hand, when it is determined in S4701 that the first operating condition is not satisfied (NO in S4701), the process shifts to the process of S4707 without performing the processes of S4703 and S4705.

When the first drive data set in S4703 is output by the drive data output process (S4203), the movable decorative member 14 operates in the first operation mode according to the first drive data (FIGS. 52 (A) to 52 (C)). , See FIGS. 55 (A)-55 (C). Further, when the operation notification command set in S4705 is transmitted to the image control board 100 by the command transmission process (S4006), the image control microcomputer 101 transmits the image data corresponding to the operation notification command to the ROM of the image control board 100. The broadcast image 500 based on the image data is displayed on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7 (see FIGS. 52 (A) to (C) and FIGS. 55 (A) to (C)).

The broadcast image 500 is displayed at a predetermined position on the display screen 7a at least while the movable decorative member 14 operates in the first operating mode, that is, while moving (raising) from the start point position to the end point position. In this embodiment, it is displayed at the lower left of the screen on the side (left side) where the movable decorative member 14 is provided. Then, when the movable decorative member 14 reaches the end point position, the notification image 500 is erased from the screen. The display (operation notification) of the notification image 500 notifies that the movable decorative member 14 moves (rises) from the start point position to the end point position (changes from the non-operating state to the operating state).

Next, in S4707, it is determined whether or not the second operating condition is satisfied (S4707). As described above, the second operating condition is a condition that triggers the execution of the second operating mode in which the movable decorative member 14 (in the second state) that has moved to the end point position is tilted to the right.

For example, when the jackpot variation effect pattern (second jackpot variation effect pattern) including the movable effect is selected (set) in the above-mentioned S4505, the movable decorative member 14 is first operated by the variation effect based on the variation effect pattern. When a predetermined tilt timing arrives after operating in the mode and reaching the end point position, the movable decorative member 14 operates in the second operating mode. Further, when an opening effect pattern including a movable effect is selected (set) in the opening effect selection process (S4900) described later, the movable decorative member 14 operates in the first operating mode in the opening effect based on the opening effect pattern. When a predetermined tilt timing arrives after reaching the end point position, the movable decorative member 14 operates in the second operating mode.

In S4707, it is determined that the second operating condition is satisfied when the movable decorative member 14 reaches the end point position and the tilt timing as described above arrives. The tilting timing of the movable decorative member 14 can be any timing after the movable decorative member 14 reaches the end point position. For example, the timing immediately after the arrival (the timing substantially the same as the arrival) or It is possible to appropriately set (include in the effect pattern) in the effect pattern, such as the timing after a few seconds have passed from the arrival (timing after the arrival).

Further, the determination of whether or not the movable decorative member 14 has reached the end point position (whether or not it is in the operating state) is determined by, for example, a sensor capable of detecting that the movable decorative member 14 is at the end point position (“end point position detection”). (Also referred to as "means" or "second position detecting means") is provided, and the detection signal can be input to the sub-control board 90 and performed based on the detection signal. Also in this case, as in the case of the start point position (non-operating state) described above, the return processing, the error notification, and the like can be configured.

When it is determined in S4707 that the second operating condition is satisfied (YES in S4707), the second drive data for operating the movable decorative member 14 in the second operating mode is set in the sub output buffer (S4709), and the second operation data is set. 2 A tilting effect command for displaying an effect accompanying the operation of the movable decorative member 14 based on the drive data is set in the sub output buffer (S4711). On the other hand, when it is determined in S4707 that the second operating condition is not satisfied (NO in S4707), the process proceeds to S4713 without performing the processes of S4709 and S4711.

When the second drive data set in S4709 is output by the drive data output process (S4203), the movable decorative member 14 operates in the second operation mode according to the second drive data (FIGS. 52 (D) and 54 (FIG. 54)). A), see FIG. 55 (D)). Further, when the tilt effect command set in S4711 is transmitted to the image control board 100 by the command transmission process (S4006), the image control microcomputer 101 transmits the image data corresponding to the tilt effect command to the ROM of the image control board 100. The effect display based on the image data is displayed on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7 (see FIGS. 52 (D), 54 (A), and 55 (D)). This effect display will be described later.

Next, in S4713, whether or not the return condition for returning the movable decorative member 14 in the operating state (second state) to the non-operating state (first state) by operating in the first operating mode or the second operating mode is satisfied. Is determined (S4713). As a result, when it is determined that the return condition is satisfied (YES in S4713), the third drive data for returning the movable decorative member 14 to the non-operating state is set in the sub output buffer (S4715), and this process is performed. Finish. On the other hand, when it is determined that the return condition is not satisfied (NO in S4713), the process proceeds to the process of S4717 described later. The establishment of the return condition will be described later.

When the third drive data set in S4715 is output by the drive data output process (S4203), the movable decorative member 14 operates in the third operation mode according to the third drive data and moves from the end point position to the start point position ( See FIGS. 54 (B) and 56 (D)).

In S4717, it is determined whether or not the movable decorative member 14 is at the end point position, that is, whether or not it is in the operating state (second state) (S4717). As described above, this determination can be made based on the detection signal of the sensor (end point position detecting means) capable of detecting that the movable decorative member 14 is at the end point position, and if the detection signal is ON, the determination can be made. It is determined that the movable decorative member 14 is at the end point position (YES in S4717), and if it is OFF, it is determined that it is not in the end point position (NO in S4717).

When it is determined in S4717 that the movable decorative member 14 is not at the end point position (NO in S4717), this process is completed without proceeding to S4719, and when it is determined that the movable decorative member 14 is in the end point position (YES in S4717). It is determined whether or not there is an input of an instruction (return instruction) for returning the movable decorative member 14 to the non-operating state (S4719). As described above, the return instruction is input by operating the return instruction button or the effect button 63. Then, it is possible to determine whether or not the return instruction is input based on the detection signal from the return instruction button detection switch or the effect button detection switch, and if the detection signal is ON, it is determined that the return instruction is input (S4719). If YES) and OFF, it is determined that there is no return instruction input (NO in S4719).

When it is determined in S4719 that there is a return instruction input (YES in S4719), the third drive data for returning the movable decorative member 14 to the non-operating state is set in the sub output buffer (S4715), and this process is performed. Finish. On the other hand, when it is determined in S4719 that there is no return instruction input (NO in S4719), it is determined whether or not the additional operating condition is satisfied (S4721).

As will be described in detail later, the additional movable effect of operating the movable decorative member 14 at the end point position (second state) relates to (a) the jackpot when the V-passing scheduled jackpot is reached in the low-accuracy low-base state. When the opening effect is started, (a) when the round advances to the next round in the jackpot game related to the jackpot, and (c) when the ST mode effect (effect mode E) after the jackpot game related to the jackpot is started. Is executed (started) respectively. Then, the additional movable effect is executed in the operation mode according to each execution timing. When any of these timings (a) to (c) arrives, it is determined that the additional operating condition is satisfied (YES in S4721). The additional movable effects executed at the respective timings (a) to (c) may have different operating modes of the movable decorative member 14, or may be the same.

When it is determined that the additional operating condition is satisfied in S4721 (YES in S4721), the movable decorative member 14 is operated in an operating mode according to the timing when the additional operating condition is satisfied (the timing of any of (a) to (c) above). Set the additional drive data for operating the sub-output buffer (S4723), and finish this process. On the other hand, if it is determined in S4721 that the additional operating condition is not satisfied (NO in S4721), this process ends without performing the process in S4723.

When the additional drive data set in S4723 is output by the drive data output process (S4203), the movable decorative member 14 operates according to the additional drive data, and the additional movable effect is executed.

In the above-mentioned S4717, it is not determined whether or not the movable decorative member 14 is in the end point position (second state), but whether or not the movable decorative member 14 is in the start point position, that is, in the inactive state (inactive state). It may be determined whether or not it is in the first state). In this case, as described above, the determination can be made based on the detection signal of the sensor (start point position detecting means) capable of detecting that the movable decorative member 14 is at the start point position, and the detection signal is ON. For example, it is determined that the movable decorative member 14 is at the start point position, and if it is OFF, it is determined that the movable decorative member 14 is not at the start point position. This is because when the movable decorative member 14 is not at the start point position, it can be considered that the movable decorative member 14 is at the end point position. Then, if it is determined that the movable decorative member 14 is not at the start point position, the process proceeds to S4719, and if it is determined that the movable decorative member 14 is at the start point position, the present process ends without proceeding to S4719. When the movable decorative member 14 is configured to determine whether or not the movable decorative member 14 is at the start point position, at least the movable decorative member 14 is detected to be at the start point position as a sensor (position detecting means) for detecting the position of the movable decorative member 14. It suffices to have a possible sensor (start point position detecting means), and even if it does not have a sensor (end point position detecting means) that can detect that it is at the end point position, it is possible to deal with the configuration, which leads to a reduction in the number of parts. ..

[Opening effect selection process]
Next, among the special game effect selection processes (S4409) executed based on the reception of the opening command from the main control board 80 in the reception command analysis process (S4302), the opening effect is the process related to the selection of the opening effect. The selection process (S4900) will be described.

As shown in FIG. 51 (B), the opening effect pattern of this embodiment includes a first opening effect pattern and a second opening effect pattern. The first opening effect pattern is an opening effect pattern that does not include a movable effect, and the second opening effect pattern is an opening effect pattern that includes a movable effect. The opening effect selection process (S4900) is a process of selecting one of the two opening effect patterns.

As shown in FIG. 47, in the opening effect selection process (S4900), first, it is determined whether or not the movable effect completed flag provided in the predetermined area of the RAM of the sub-control board 90 is ON (S4901). The movable effect completed flag is a flag indicating whether or not the variation effect based on the jackpot variation effect pattern (second jackpot variation effect pattern) including the movable effect has been executed, and is turned ON when the variation effect is executed.

Therefore, when the jackpot game is started after the variable effect based on the big hit variation effect pattern (second big hit variation effect pattern) including the movable effect, the movable effect has been turned ON. On the other hand, when the jackpot game is started after the variable effect based on the big hit variation effect pattern (first big hit variation effect pattern) that does not include the movable effect, the movable effect has been turned off.

When it is determined in S4901 that the movable effect has been turned ON (YES in S4901), when the first opening effect pattern is selected (S4903), and when it is determined that the movable effect has not been turned ON (OFF) (NO in S4901). ), Select the second opening effect pattern (S4905). After that, the movable production flag is cleared (S4907), and this process is completed.

When the first opening effect pattern is selected (set), the opening effect that does not include the movable effect is executed. For example, the opening effect is executed by the image display device 7 or the like under the condition that the movable decorative member 14 is in the operating state or the movable decorative member 14 that has been in the operating state returns to the non-operating state. See FIGS. 53 (A) and 54 (B)).

When the second opening effect pattern is selected (set), the opening effect including the movable effect is executed. For example, the opening effect is executed by the image display device 7 or the like with the change from the non-operating state to the operating state (that is, the movable effect) of the movable decorative member 14 (see FIGS. 55 (A) to 55 (D)). ).

In the pachinko gaming machine 1, various effects are executed according to the progress of the game under the control process by the effect control microcomputer 91 described above. In the following, among such effects, an example of an effect related to the movable effect-related process (S4305) and the opening effect selection process (S4900) (the effect executed under the control of the effect control means) will be described. The step (S) in the description according to the following production examples 1 to 3 corresponds to the step of control processing by the effect control microcomputer 91 described above.

[Production example 1]
An effect example 1 will be described with reference to FIGS. 52 and 53. The effect example 1 is an effect when the "big hit variation effect including the movable effect (second big hit variation effect pattern)" is executed in association with the variable game in the low accuracy and low base state as the variable effect related to the V passing scheduled big hit. It shows the flow (development) of. That is, a jackpot scheduled to pass through V (for example, 7R 1st jackpot, 7R 3rd jackpot, 7R 5th jackpot or 7R 7th jackpot) occurs in a low probability low base state, and a variable game (specific variable game) related to the jackpot occurs. This is the case where the variation effect based on the second jackpot variation effect pattern is executed.

In the variation effect based on the second jackpot variation effect pattern (variation effect with movable effect), the reach effect is executed (displayed) on the display screen 7a at a predetermined time during the variation effect (during the specific variation game). After that, when the reach effect develops into the SP reach effect in the variable effect, an image corresponding to the SP reach effect (also referred to as “SP reach effect image”) is displayed on the display screen 7a. The SP reach effect image is an example of a “predetermined image”, and the SP reach effect is an example of a “first display effect” that displays the SP reach effect image (predetermined image) on the display screen 7a. Further, the gaming state (here, the low probability and low base state) when the SP reach effect (first display effect) is executed is an example of the "first game state".

In the SP reach production, for example, a production image (animation image) having a story, such as a friendly character and an enemy character confronting each other or a character challenging a mission, is displayed as an SP reach production image. Then, when a predetermined operation start timing arrives after the development of the SP reach effect (YES in S4701), the movable decorative member 14 at the start point position (first state) operates in the first operation mode (S4703). The flow of the effect when the SP reach effect is executed is shown in FIGS. 52 (A) to 52 (C).

As shown in FIGS. 52 (A) to 52 (C), the SP reach effect (first display effect) is executed during the variation effect, and the movable effect that the movable decorative member 14 operates in the first operation mode is executed. In the above-mentioned S4505, the jackpot variation effect pattern including the movable effect (second jackpot variation effect pattern) or the deviation variation effect pattern including the movable effect (third deviation variation effect pattern) is selected (set). This is the case. Therefore, when the second jackpot variation effect pattern or the third out-of-range variation effect pattern is selected (set) in S4505, the execution conditions of the SP reach effect (first display effect) and the movable effect are satisfied.

Further, when the SP reach effect is executed, the effect symbol 8 in the state where the reach is established (reach state) is displayed (reduced display) at the lower left of the display screen 7a in a smaller size than usual (see FIG. 3). ..

When the operation start timing of the movable decorative member 14 arrives during the execution (displaying) of the SP reach effect, the movable decorative member 14 is activated (movable effect) at the lower left of the display screen 7a (near the movable decorative member 14). A notification image 500 indicating that the state of the means changes) is displayed. The notification image 500 is displayed based on the operation notification command (S4705). The notification image 500 is an example of "information about the movable effect means", and the display screen 7a (image display device 7) for displaying the notification image 500 is an example of the "notification means". The notification image 500 is also displayed when the movable decorative member 14 operates in the first operation mode in the deviation variation effect (third deviation variation effect pattern) including the movable effect.

Here, in this embodiment, the notification image 500 is a figure (illustration) representing a "hand pointing to the side of the movable decorative member 14", but the fact that the movable decorative member 14 operates (the state of the movable effect means changes). The mode is not particularly limited as long as the player can recognize the above. For example, it is possible to display characters (messages) such as "operating" and "attention", and to display an arrow pointing toward the movable decorative member 14. Further, it is also possible to notify that the movable decorative member 14 is activated (the state of the movable effect means is changed) by the voice from the speaker 67, or by lighting the board lamp 5.

As shown in FIGS. 52 (A) to 52 (C), the movable decorative member 14 operates in the first operating mode during the SP reach effect and rises from the start point position to the end point position (changes from the first state to the second state). During that time, the broadcast image 500 is continuously displayed. FIG. 52 (B) shows a state in which the movable decorative member 14 is rising toward the end point position, and FIG. 52 (C) shows a state in which the movable decorative member 14 has reached the end point position (second state).

Next, when a predetermined tilt timing arrives after the movable decorative member 14 reaches the end point position as shown in FIG. 52 (C) (YES in S4707), the movable decorative member 14 is then shown in FIG. 52 (D). Operates in the second operating mode and tilts to the right (S4709). At this time, on the display screen 7a, a jackpot notification effect for notifying that the result of the variation effect (reach effect) is a jackpot is executed (displayed), and an effect for notifying that the jackpot is a V-passing scheduled jackpot. Image 510 is displayed. That is, after the SP reach effect (first display effect) is completed, the jackpot notification effect and the V-passing scheduled jackpot notification by the effect image 510 are executed while maintaining the second state (end point position) of the movable decorative member 14. .. The jackpot notification effect is also called "specific notification effect".

Further, when the big hit notification effect is executed, the effect symbol 8 reduced and displayed at the lower right of the display screen 7a during the SP reach effect is temporarily stopped and displayed in the big hit mode with the reduced display.

Further, when the movable decorative member 14 is operated (tilted to the right) in the second operating mode, the notification image 500 that has been displayed up to that point is erased from the screen and is hidden. When the movable decorative member 14 operates in the second operating mode, the notification image 500 may be continuously displayed, or another notification image indicating that the movable decorative member 14 operates in the second operating mode may be displayed. You may.

Here, in the jackpot notification effect, for example, an image suggesting a jackpot (also referred to as a “big hit suggestion image”” such as a scene in which a ally character wins a confrontation with an enemy character or a scene in which a character clears (achieves) a mission. ) Is displayed on the display screen 7a. The jackpot suggestion image is an example of a "predetermined image", and the jackpot notification effect is an example of a "second display effect" for displaying a jackpot suggestion image (predetermined image) on the display screen 7a.

The effect image 510 is displayed based on the tilt effect command (S4711), and is displayed as the movable decorative member 14 is tilted to the right. Such tilting of the movable decorative member 14 to the right and the accompanying display of the effect image 510 are also referred to as "tilt effect". The tilting effect is an example of "an effect using the movable effect member in the second state".

In this embodiment, the effect image 510 is a telop display (telop image) in which the display content (information) is moved (flows) from the flag portion of the movable decorative member 14 tilted to the right toward the right side of the screen. .. In addition, the effect image 510 for notifying the fact that the jackpot is scheduled to pass through V includes the character "super lucky!", And the player is made to recognize the occurrence of the jackpot scheduled to pass through V through the character. See FIG. 52 (D)). The effect image 510 for notifying that the jackpot is scheduled to pass through V may be any as long as it can make the player recognize the occurrence of the jackpot scheduled to pass through V, and the mode thereof is not particularly limited.

In this way, after the movable decorative member 14 is tilted to the right at the end point position to perform the jackpot notification effect and the tilting effect, the effect pattern that has been temporarily stopped and displayed in the jackpot mode at the lower right of the display screen 7a until then. 8 returns to the normal size (enlarged) and is fixedly stopped at the lower part of the effect image 510 (not shown). When the stop display time (big hit stop display time) related to this fixed stop elapses, the variation effect (specific variation game) ends. Next to this, on the display screen 7a, as shown in FIGS. 53 (A) to 53 (C), the movable decorative member 14 is scheduled to pass through V while being tilted to the right at the end point position (operating state, second state). The production is developed in the order of the opening effect at the start of the big hit game related to the big hit, the round effect during the big hit game (during the round game), and the ST mode effect (effect mode E) after the big hit game. That is, after the end of the SP reach effect (first display effect), the jackpot notification effect, opening effect, round effect, ending effect (not shown), while maintaining the second state (end point position) of the movable decorative member 14. The ST mode effect is executed in this order. The opening effect according to the first effect example 1 is an opening effect (first opening effect pattern) that does not include a movable effect.

The opening effect is executed when the gaming state shifts to the jackpot gaming state and before the first round of the jackpot game is started (opening period). When the opening effect is executed, as shown in FIG. 53 (A), the content of the effect image 510 (telop display) indicates the number of times a big hit has occurred. This indicates the number of occurrences (number of consecutive villas) in anticipation of the subsequent continuous occurrence of big hits (so-called "renso") in the ST mode (high accuracy and high base state). Here, the case where the character "first time" is displayed corresponding to the occurrence of the big hit scheduled to pass through V as the so-called "first hit" is shown. After that, this number of times display is added according to the number of times of occurrence while the big hit occurrence in ST mode is repeated.

When the opening effect is started (YES in S4721), the movable decorative member 14 vibrates (oscillates) for a predetermined time in a state of being tilted to the right at the end point position. The vibration (swing) of the movable decorative member 14 is the first additional movable effect, and is executed according to the additional drive data set in S4723. The time for the movable decorative member 14 to vibrate (swing) is set to be equal to or less than the execution time (opening time) of the opening effect. In accordance with the vibration (vibration) of the movable decorative member 14, the display of the number of large hits generated by the effect image 510 (telop display) is started.

Here, in the opening effect, for example, an image (also referred to as an “opening image”) such as a message for notifying the start of a big hit game (big hit game state) or a background is displayed on the display screen 7a. The opening image is an example of a "predetermined image", and the opening effect is an example of a "second display effect" for displaying the opening image (predetermined image) on the display screen 7a. Further, the game state (big hit game state) when the opening effect (second display effect) is executed is an example of the "second game state". Further, when the opening effect is started, the movable decorative member 14 vibrates (swings) in a state of being tilted to the right at the end point position (first additional movable effect), and a big hit occurs due to the accompanying effect image 510. The display of the number of times is an example of "the effect using the movable effect member in the second state".

Following the opening effect, a round effect is executed (displayed) on the display screen 7a. The round effect is executed when the game state is the big hit game state (during the big hit game). When the round effect is executed, as shown in FIG. 53 (B), the content of the effect image 510 (telop display) is the number of prize balls won in the jackpot game (the amount of game profit given by the player). It indicates the number of big hits (number of consecutive villas) mentioned above. The display of the number of winning prize balls (also referred to as "displaying the number of winning prize balls") is updated (added) based on the detection of the entry of the game ball into the large winning opening. In the winning prize ball number display, the number of winning prize balls per big hit game can be displayed, or the total number of winning prize balls when the big hits are consecutively villas can be displayed.

The round effect is executed in each round game from the first round to the final round, and when the interval period between the round games is started (YES in S4721), the movable decorative member 14 at the end point position is activated. As shown in 52 (C), it is tilted to the left, and when the interval period ends (YES in S4721), the movable decorative member 14 at the end point is activated to the right as shown in FIG. 53 (B). It becomes a state of being inclined to. The tilting of the movable decorative member 14 to the left and right triggered by the start and end of this interval period is the second additional movable effect, and is executed according to the additional drive data set in S4723. From the second round onward, the round effect progresses (the content of the round effect changes) in accordance with the operation of the movable decorative member 14 (tilting to the right) triggered by the end of the interval period (start of the next round). To go.

Here, in the round effect, for example, characters (numbers) and items indicating the number of rounds being executed, and images such as characters and backgrounds corresponding to the rounds being executed (also referred to as “round images”) are displayed on the display screen 7a. Is displayed. The round image is an example of a "predetermined image", and the round effect is an example of a "second display effect" for displaying a round image (predetermined image) on the display screen 7a. Further, the game state (big hit game state) when the round effect (second display effect) is executed is an example of the "second game state". Further, the movable decorative member 14 is tilted to the left at the end point position with the start of the interval period, and the movable decorative member 14 is tilted to the right at the end point position with the end of the interval period (start of the next round). The display of the number of prize balls won and the number of big hits generated by the effect image 510 accompanying the effect (second additional movable effect) is an example of "the effect using the movable effect member in the second state". is there.

In the ST mode (high accuracy and high base state) after the big hit game, which shifts through the opening effect and the round effect, the ST mode effect is executed. In the ST mode effect, as shown in FIG. 53 (C), the content of the effect image 510 (telop display) indicates that the current gaming state is the ST mode (high accuracy and high base state). At this time, an image 520 (remaining fluctuation number image) showing the remaining fluctuation number (ST period) until the end of the ST mode is also displayed on the display screen 7a.

When the ST mode effect is started (YES in S4721), the movable decorative member 14 at the end point reciprocates between the state of being tilted to the right and the state of being tilted to the left (see FIG. 52 (C)). A continuous reciprocating operation that repeats the operation (tilting left and right) is started, and the continuous reciprocating operation is continuously executed during the ST mode production (during the ST mode). The continuous reciprocating operation of the movable decorative member 14 is a third additional movable effect, and is executed according to the additional drive data set in S4723. Further, along with the continuous reciprocating operation of the movable decorative member 14, the display in the ST mode is executed by the effect image 510 (telop display).

Here, in the ST mode effect, for example, an image of a character or background for the ST mode (also referred to as an “ST mode image”) is displayed on the display screen 7a. The ST mode image is an example of a “predetermined image”, and the ST mode effect is an example of a “second display effect” for displaying the ST mode image (predetermined image) on the display screen 7a. Further, the game state (high accuracy and high base state) when the ST mode effect (second display effect) is executed is an example of the "second game state". Further, the effect that the movable decorative member 14 continuously reciprocates at the end point position during the ST mode effect (third additional movable effect) and the display in the ST mode by the accompanying effect image 510 are "movable in the second state". This is an example of "directing using a directing member".

In this way, after the movable decorative member 14 shifts to the ST mode with the movable decorative member 14 at the end point position (operating state, second state), the ST mode is repeated with the V-passing jackpot (V-passing) in between. As long as (following), the movable decorative member 14 is kept in the operating state (second state), and the variable game (variable effect) and the big hit game (big hit game effect) are executed in the same state. Therefore, during the ST mode, the variable effect pattern including the movable effect and the opening effect pattern (see FIG. 51) are not selected (set). Then, after shifting to the ST mode, when the variable game is executed a predetermined number of times (for example, 150 times) without the occurrence of a jackpot and the ST mode ends, or when the ST mode ends due to the occurrence of a V non-passing scheduled jackpot (S4713). YES), the movable decorative member 14 operates in the third operating mode and returns to the non-operating state (first state) (S4715). That is, the condition for returning the movable decorative member 14 in the operating state (second state) to the non-operating state (first state) is satisfied together with the end condition of the ST mode.

In this embodiment, when the movable decorative member 14 operates in the third operating mode (when returning to the non-operating state), the information regarding the operation (that the state of the movable effect means changes) is not notified. There is. This is because the return of the movable decorative member 14 is due to the end of the movable effect, and has no particular meaning in terms of game progress (in terms of effect). Therefore, when the movable decorative member 14 returns to the non-operating state, the player is not positively notified of this. This also applies to the production examples 2 and 3 described later.

Even when the movable decorative member 14 returns to the non-operating state, it is possible to display a notification image indicating the return on the display screen 7a as in the case where the movable decorative member 14 rises from the start point position to the end point position. Is.

[Production example 2]
Next, an effect example 2 will be described with reference to FIG. 54. The same points as in Production Example 1 will be omitted or simplified. In the production example 2, as the fluctuation production related to the V non-passing scheduled jackpot, the production when the jackpot fluctuation production including the movable production (second jackpot fluctuation production pattern) is executed in association with the fluctuation game in the low probability low base state. It shows the flow (development) of. That is, a V non-passing scheduled jackpot (for example, 7R 2nd jackpot, 7R 4th jackpot or 7R 6th jackpot) occurs in a low probability low base state, and a second jackpot in a variable game (specific variable game) related to the jackpot. This is the case where the variation effect based on the variation effect pattern is executed.

Of the "big hit variation effects including movable effects" related to the V non-passing scheduled big hits, the contents of the effects before the big hit notification effect shown in FIG. 54 (A) is shown in FIG. 52 (A) described in the effect example 1. ) To (C) are the same.

Then, as shown in FIG. 54 (A), when the end point position is reached and a predetermined tilt timing arrives (YES in S4707), the movable decorative member 14 at the end point position (second state) is in the second operation mode. It operates and tilts to the right (S4709). At this time, a jackpot notification effect (big hit suggestion image) is displayed on the display screen 7a, and an effect image 510 (tilt effect) is displayed to notify that the jackpot is a V non-passing scheduled jackpot (S4711). ..

In this embodiment, the effect image 510 corresponding to the V non-passing scheduled jackpot includes the characters "lucky!". This replaces the character "super lucky!" In the production image 510 corresponding to the V non-passing scheduled jackpot in the above production example 1, and the character "lucky!" Without "super" in "super lucky!" Through this, the player is made to recognize the occurrence of the V non-passing scheduled jackpot. It should be noted that the effect image 510 for notifying that the V non-passing scheduled jackpot has occurred may be any aspect as long as it can make the player recognize the occurrence of the V non-passing scheduled jackpot.

In this way, when the movable decorative member 14 is tilted to the right at the end point position to execute the jackpot notification effect and the tilting effect, and then the opening period of the jackpot game related to the jackpot scheduled to pass through V is started (YES in S4713). ), The movable decorative member 14 operates in the third operating mode and returns to the non-operating state (first state) (S4715). In this case, the condition for returning the movable decorative member 14 in the operating state (second state) to the non-operating state (first state) is satisfied based on the start of the jackpot game (opening period) (reception of the opening command). .. At this time, the movable decorative member 14 is in an inactive state by the end of the opening period (during the opening period).

In addition, if a start gate (special game start port) for starting a big hit game is provided and a big hit game is started based on the game ball passing through the start gate after the stop display of the big hit symbol, the start gate is reached. The above-mentioned return condition may be satisfied based on the passage of the game ball.

After the movable decorative member 14 returns to the non-operating state, as shown in FIG. 54C, a round effect (round game) is executed while the movable decorative member 14 is kept in the non-operating state, and the jackpot game is performed. Even when the later variable game (variable effect) is executed, the movable decorative member 14 is kept in an inactive state unless the variable effect including the movable effect is executed.

[Production example 3]
Next, the production example 3 will be described with reference to FIGS. 55 and 56. The same points as in Production Examples 1 and 2 will be omitted or simplified. The effect example 3 shows the flow (development) of the effect when the opening effect (second opening effect pattern) including the movable effect is executed triggered by the occurrence of a big hit in the low accuracy and low base state.

The opening effect including the movable effect is executed when the jackpot variation effect (first jackpot variation effect pattern) that does not include the movable effect is executed before the opening effect is reached. In this embodiment, when a jackpot variation effect that does not include a movable effect is executed, whether the jackpot that is the trigger for the execution is a "V-passing scheduled jackpot" or a "V non-passing scheduled jackpot" is determined by the V-round of the jackpot game. It is decided not to notify until the result of (5th round in this example) is confirmed. For this reason, the jackpot variation effect that does not include the movable effect is referred to as a "big hit type non-notification effect" in which the jackpot type cannot be determined through the reach effect, the jackpot notification effect, the stop display mode of the effect symbol 8, etc. during the variation effect. It has become.

In the opening effect based on the second opening effect pattern (opening effect with movable effect), when the start timing of the opening period arrives (YES in S4701), as shown in FIGS. 55 (A) to 55 (C), the movable decorative member 14 It operates in the first operating mode and rises from the start point position to the end point position (S4703). At this time, on the display screen 7a, the opening effect is executed (displayed), and the notification image 500 indicating that the movable decorative member 14 is activated (the state of the movable effect means changes) is displayed (S4705). In the opening effect, the above-mentioned opening image (predetermined image) is displayed on the display screen 7a. Further, the display of the notification image 500 is started when the movable decorative member 14 starts the operation in the first operation mode.

Next, when the movable decorative member 14 reaches the end point position as shown in FIG. 55 (C) and a predetermined tilt timing arrives (YES in S4707), the movable decorative member 14 moves as shown in FIG. 55 (D). A tilting effect that operates in the second operating mode and tilts to the right is executed (S4709). At this time, the display screen 7a displays an effect image 510 (telop display) including characters (for example, "I did it!") Congratulating the big hit (S4711).

In this way, during the execution of the opening effect (during the opening period), the movable decorative member 14 rises from the start point position to the end point position, and then the movable decorative member 14 tilts to the right to execute the tilt effect. The opening effect (opening period) ends and the round game proceeds while the movable decorative member 14 is kept tilted to the right at the end point position (operating state, second state). Along with this, a round effect is executed (displayed) on the display screen 7a. In the round effect, the above-mentioned round image is displayed on the display screen 7a.

After shifting to the round game (round effect), the state in which the movable decorative member 14 is tilted to the right at the end point position (second state) is maintained until at least the V round (fifth round). Then, when the round game (big hit game) being executed at that time is due to the big hit scheduled to pass through V, as shown in FIG. 56 (A), the round effect of the V round is executed (displayed). When a game ball that has entered the V attacker (second prize opening 35) passes through a specific area 39 (passes V) (S4413, S4415), an effect including a character (for example, "V") that notifies the occurrence of V passage. Image 510 (telop display) is displayed on the display screen 7a. At this time, the same additional movable effect as the first additional movable effect described above is executed, and the movable decorative member 14 vibrates (swings) for a predetermined time (for example, 3 seconds) in a state of being tilted to the right at the end point position. .. Even after this (after the V passage occurs), the movable decorative member 14 is kept in a state of being tilted to the right (operating state, second state) at the end point position, and thereafter, after the jackpot game, the mode shifts to the ST mode, and the ST mode The movable decorative member 14 is kept in an operating state as long as is repeated (followed by a series of villas) with a big hit scheduled to pass through V (passing through V).

On the other hand, when the round game (big hit game) being executed is due to a big hit scheduled to not pass through V, the possibility that the game ball passes through V during the V round is extremely low, and the V round ends without passing through V. Is normal. In this case, when the V round ends without passing through the V, as shown in FIG. 56 (B), the movable decorative member 14 operates in the third operating mode and returns to the non-operating state (first state) (S4715). ). Here, the end of the V round related to the V non-passing scheduled jackpot is a condition (return condition) for returning the movable decorative member 14 to the non-operating state (YES in S4713). After that, as shown in FIG. 56 (B), the round effect (round game) is executed while the movable decorative member 14 is kept in the non-operating state, and the variable game (variable effect) after the big hit game is executed. Even so, the movable decorative member 14 is kept in an inactive state unless a variable effect including a movable effect is executed.

Here, in the present effect example 3, the opening effect (see FIG. 55) for displaying the opening image (predetermined image) on the display screen 7a is an example of the “first display effect”, and the movable decoration based on the start of the opening period. The movement and tilting effect (see FIG. 55) of the member 14 from the start point position to the end point position is an example of the “movable effect”, and the round effect (see FIG. 56) for displaying a round image (predetermined image) on the display screen 7a. ) Is an example of the "second display effect", and the vibration (oscillation) of the movable decorative member 14 based on the passage of V during the V round is an example of the "effect using the movable effect member in the second state". ..

[Action and effect of Example 1]
In the pachinko gaming machine 1 of the present embodiment described above, the movable decorative member 14 (movable effect member) is the first in addition to the SP reach effect (previous display effect, first display effect) during the variable effect (during the variable game). When the movable effect that operates in the operating mode is executed, the movable decorative member 14 that has been in the operating state (second state) due to the movable effect is kept in the operating state even after the end of the SP reach effect, and the state is maintained. , Big hit notification effect (later display effect, second display effect), opening effect (later display effect, second display effect), round effect (later display effect, second display effect) and ST mode effect (later display effect) The display effect and the second display effect) can be executed (effect example 1).

In addition, when a movable effect in which the movable decorative member 14 operates in the first operating mode is executed together with the opening effect (previous display effect, first display effect) during the opening period of the jackpot game, the movable effect causes the operating state ( The movable decorative member 14 in the second state) is kept in the operating state even after the opening effect is completed, and the round effect (later display effect, second display effect) can be executed while maintaining that state (effect example). 3).

Therefore, the movable decorative member 14 is maintained in the operating state (second state) from the execution of the previous display effect (first display effect) to the execution of the subsequent display effect (second display effect). As a result, it is possible to associate the previous display effect (first display effect), the movable effect, and the later display effect (second display effect) to enhance the effect when these effects are executed. ..

Further, in the pachinko gaming machine 1 of the present embodiment, the movable decorative member 14 at the end point position (operating state, second state) is operated to tilt to the right (tilting effect of production example 1), or at the end point position. The effect of vibrating (swinging) the movable decorative member 14 in the state of being tilted to the right (second state) (first additional movable effect of effect example 1, additional movable effect of effect example 2), right at the end point position. A production in which the movable decorative member 14 in a tilted state (second state) is tilted left and right (second additional movable production in production example 1), and a production in which the movable decorative member 14 is continuously reciprocated at the end point position (production example). It is possible to execute the third additional movable effect of 1). Therefore, after the movable decorative member 14 is in the operating state (second state), another effect using the movable decorative member 14 can be further executed in that state. This makes it possible to further enhance the effect.

Further, in the pachinko gaming machine 1 of the present embodiment, as shown in the production example 1, the SP reach effect (first) is performed in the variable game (specific variable game) executed in the low probability low base state (first game state). The display effect (first display effect) and the movable effect in which the movable decorative member 14 moves from the start point position to the end point position are executed. Then, in the jackpot opening period (second game state) following the end of the variable game (low probability low base state), the opening effect (later display effect, second display effect) and the first additional movable effect are executed. , The round effect (later display effect, second display effect) and the second additional movable effect are executed from the first round to the final round of the round game (second game state) following the end of the opening period, and the final round. In the high-accuracy high-base state (second game state) that continues via the ending period after the end of, the ST mode effect (later display effect, second display effect) and the third additional movable effect are executed. In this case, the game state (first game state) in which the first display effect (first display effect) is executed and the game state (second game state) in which the later display effect (second display effect) is executed. The movable decorative member 14 is maintained in the operating state (second state) across the two gaming states. This makes it possible to enhance the effect of the effect between the gaming states.

Further, in the pachinko gaming machine 1 of the present embodiment, after the movable decorative member 14 is in the operating state (second state) (YES in S4707, S4709), the return condition (end condition) that can be satisfied according to the progress of the game. (NO in S4713, YES in S4717), the player operates the return instruction button to input the return instruction (YES in S4719), and the movable decorative member 14 in the operating state is displayed. It is possible to return to the non-operating state (S4715) at the player's will. This makes it possible to improve the functionality of the game machine provided with the movable decorative member 14.

In the first embodiment, the movable effect member (movable effect means) used in the movable effect is the movable decorative member 14 provided on the left side of the center decorative body 10, but the form of the movable effect member is the same as in the first embodiment. Not limited. For example, it is usually located approximately in the center of the upper part of the center decoration body 10 (standby position), and when a predetermined operating condition is satisfied, it descends (falls) to the front side (operating position) of the display screen 7a. Or, it is usually located in the lower center of the center decoration body 10 (standby position), and when a predetermined operating condition is satisfied, the movable body for production that rises to the front side (operating position) of the display screen 7a is movable. It may be used as a directing member. Further, it is not provided on the game board 2 (board surface) such as the center decorative body 10, but is provided on the frame body (for example, the upper part of the frame body) constituting the outer shell of the pachinko game machine 1 (game machine). A movable body (frame movable role object, frame gimmick) may be used as a movable effect member. The movable effect member as a frame gimmick is, for example, normally in a state where the movable body is stored in the storage portion (first state), and when a predetermined operating condition is satisfied, the movable body stored in the storage portion is external. It can be configured to be in a state exposed to (second state). With these, it is possible to obtain the same effects as in Example 1.

Further, in the first embodiment, the notification image 500 is displayed at the timing when the movable decorative member 14 starts the operation in the first operation mode (YES in S4701, S4705), but at the timing before the start of the operation. , The movable decorative member 14 may be notified that the movable decorative member 14 is activated. For example, at a predetermined time (for example, 5 seconds before) the start of operation of the movable decorative member 14, a timer display indicating the remaining time until the start of operation in a countdown format is displayed to notify that the state of the movable decorative member 14 changes. As a result, it can be configured to be displayed on the image display device 7 (display screen 7a) or other display device. In this way, it is possible to direct the player's attention to the movable effect even before the start of operation of the movable decorative member 14 and enhance the interest.

Further, in the first embodiment, the movable decorative member 14 changes the movable effect member 14 from the non-operating state (first state) to the operating state (second state) from the start point position (standby position) to the end point position (operation). It was supposed to move to the position) and further tilt or vibrate (swing) at the end point position, but the mode of the movable effect is not limited to this. For example, the position of the movable body constituting the movable effect member (movable effect means) does not change (move), but the appearance (form) of the movable body changes, the movable body rotates at a fixed position, and the like. , The non-operating state (first state) and the operating state (second state) may be accompanied by some change (difference). In addition, the movable effect member (movable effect means) is composed of a plurality of movable bodies, and each movable body is usually separated from each standby position (non-operating state, first state), and each movable body operates. It is also possible to create a movable effect such that one motif (modeled object) is completed (operating state, second state) by combining (integrating).

Further, in the first embodiment, the movable decorative member 14 operates in the first operating mode based on the establishment of the first operating condition, and then operates in the second operating mode based on the establishment of the second operating condition. The movable decorative member 14 is a first operating mode and a second operating mode based on the establishment of one operating condition without separating the operating condition that triggers the first operating mode and the operating condition that triggers the second operating mode. The operation may be performed in the order of, or the first operation mode and the second operation mode may be a series of (one) operation modes. Further, the movable effect (excluding the additional movable effect) may be configured in the first operation mode in which the movable decorative member 14 operates from the start point position to the end point position without performing the tilt effect as in the first embodiment. .. In short, it is possible to take a state in which the movable effect member is not operating (non-operating state, first state) and a state in which it is operating (operating state, second state), and is in the operating state (second state). As long as the effect is exhibited, the movable effect (execution mode) is not particularly limited.

Next, Example 2 of the present invention will be described. In the following, the parts different from the first embodiment will be mainly described, and the parts common to the first embodiment will be omitted or simplified. Further, in the following description, the same reference numerals, the number of control steps, etc. as those of the first embodiment are used for the configurations different from (replacement) with the first embodiment, and the same reference numerals, the number of control steps, etc. are used for the common configurations. Will be used.

In this embodiment, as compared with the above-described first embodiment, mainly the configuration of the movable decorative member (movable effect member, movable effect means) and the movable effect related processing executed by the effect control microcomputer 91 (effect control means). The contents of the above and the mode of the movable production are different.

Specifically, in the above-described first embodiment, as the movable effect member used for the movable effect, a movable decorative member 14 made of one movable body having a flag as a motif is provided. On the other hand, in the present embodiment, instead of the movable decorative member 14, as shown in FIGS. 57 and 58, a movable decorative member 141 composed of two movable bodies, an upper movable body 141A and a lower movable body 141B, is provided. There is.

As shown in FIG. 57, the movable decorative member 141 is in a state in which the upper movable body 141A and the lower movable body 141B are vertically separated (separated) (also referred to as a “separated state”), and as shown in FIG. 58. , The upper movable body 141A and the lower movable body 141B are configured to be operable between a state in which they are close to each other (also referred to as an “approaching state”), and are usually in a separated state.

The separated state is an example of the "first state", which is the non-operating state before the movable decorative member 141 is activated, and the approaching state is the operating state after the movable decorative member 141 is activated. This is an example of the "second state".

When the movable decorative member 141 is in the separated state (first state), the upper movable body 141A and the lower movable body 141B are in the standby position (starting point position), respectively. The standby position of the upper movable body 141A is behind the decorative member 13 (back side), and the standby position of the lower movable body 141B is below the stage 11 and behind the fixed winning device 19 (back side). (See FIG. 57).

When the upper movable body 141A and the lower movable body 141B are in the standby positions, the upper movable body 141A and the lower movable body 141B are not exposed to the outside and cannot be seen (or are difficult to see) from the player side facing the display screen 7a. It becomes. At this time, the upper movable body 141A and the lower movable body 141B do not exist on the front side of the display screen 7a (display area) that can be visually recognized from the player side, and the visibility of the display screen 7a is hindered by the movable decorative member 141. (See FIG. 57).

Then, when a predetermined operating condition is satisfied, the movable decorative member 141 is activated, the upper movable body 141A descends the front side of the display screen 7a, and the lower movable body 141B rises the front side of the display screen 7a to each other. It approaches a position where it makes substantially contact, and is in an approaching state (second state). When the movable decorative member 141 is in an approaching state, the upper movable body 141A and the lower movable body 141B are in the operating position (end point position), respectively. The operating positions of the upper movable body 141A and the lower movable body 141B are set to be near the center of the display screen 7a, respectively, and the lower end (lower side) of the upper movable body 141A and the upper end (upper side) of the lower movable body 141B are substantially in contact with each other. Positioned (see FIG. 58).

As shown in FIG. 58, when the movable decorative member 141 is in an approaching state, the two movable bodies 141A and 141B are integrally formed to form a star-themed shape (star role object). At this time, the upper movable body 141A and the lower movable body 141B are present on the substantially central front side of the display screen 7a, and the portion (substantially central portion) of the display screen 7a facing the upper movable body 141A and the lower movable body 141B is present. It is covered by the two movable bodies 141A and 141B (movable decorative member 141). Therefore, the portion of the display screen 7a (display area) covered by the movable decorative member 141 becomes invisible (or difficult to see) from the player side facing the display screen 7a.

As described above, in the present embodiment, when the movable decorative member 141 is in the separated state (first state), the portion of the display screen 7a covered by the movable decorative member 141 is compared with the case where the movable decorative member 141 is in the approaching state (second state). When the movable decorative member 141 is in the approaching state (second state), the portion of the display screen 7a covered by the movable decorative member 141 is larger than when the movable decorative member 141 is in the separated state (first state). It is configured in.

Further, the upper movable body 141A and the lower movable body 141B each have an LED (light emitting member) built-in (not shown), and the LED is configured to emit light when the movable decorative member 141 is in an approaching state. ing. The light emission (light effect) of the LED is executed based on the control signal (lamp data) from the sub-control board 90 (S4202).

When the upper movable body 141A and the lower movable body 141B of this embodiment have their exteriors made of a translucent translucent resin, such as an LED lighting cover, and the movable decorative member 141 is in an approaching state. It is possible to make the movable decorative member 141 appear to shine by the light effect executed in. As described above, the light effect executed when the movable decorative member 141 is in the approaching state is an example of "the effect using the movable effect member in the second state".

When the movable decorative member 141 (upper movable body 141A and lower movable body 141B) is in the approaching state (second state) and the predetermined return condition (end condition) is satisfied, the upper movable body 141A rises and moves downward. Body 141B descends and moves to each standby position. As a result, the movable decorative member 141 returns (returns) to the separated state (first state), and the movable effect by the movable decorative member 141 ends.

The operation of the movable decorative member 141 is realized by a drive mechanism (not shown) including a motor, a gear, a link mechanism, etc. for moving the upper movable body 141A and the lower movable body 141B up and down. Since the configuration of the drive mechanism itself is not related to the gist of the present invention, detailed description of the drive mechanism will be omitted.

[Movable production-related processing of Example 2]
Next, the movable effect-related processing (S5000) of this embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. 59. The movable effect-related process (S5000) of the present embodiment replaces the movable effect-related process (S4305) of the first embodiment.

As shown in FIG. 59, in the movable effect related process (S5000), first, it is determined whether or not the operating condition of the movable decorative member 141, which is the execution condition (start condition) of the movable effect, is satisfied (S5001). Here, the movable effect of the present embodiment is executed during the variable effect when the variable effect is executed based on the variable effect pattern including both the reach effect and the movable effect. As described in the first embodiment, the variable effect pattern including both the reach effect and the movable effect includes a pattern corresponding to the case where the result of the special symbol hit / fail judgment is a big hit (second big hit variable effect pattern). There is a pattern (third deviation variation effect pattern) corresponding to the case of deviation (see FIG. 51).

The execution timing of the movable effect of this embodiment, that is, the operation start timing of the movable decorative member 141 can be appropriately set (included in the variable effect pattern) in the variable effect pattern. For example, when the SP reach effect is started, or when the big hit notification effect suggesting that the result of the variable effect (variable game) is a big hit is started, the operation start timing of the movable decorative member 141 (movable effect) Execution timing). In S5001, when the operation start timing of such a movable decorative member 141 arrives, it is determined that the operating condition of the movable decorative member 141 is satisfied (YES in S5001).

Further, in the operating condition of the movable decorative member 141, in addition to the arrival of the operation start timing (execution timing of the movable effect), the effect button 63 (first effect button 63a or second effect button 63b) is a predetermined operation mode ( It can be included that the operation was performed by pressing once, pressing and holding, repeatedly hitting, etc.). In this case, for example, the operation start timing (for example, the winning branch timing described later) arrives during the variable effect, and the operation of the effect button (detection by the effect button detection switch) is enabled within the operation valid period. When the first effect button 63a is operated in the mode of being pressed once, it is determined that the operating condition of the movable decorative member 141 is satisfied (YES in S5001).

Here, during the operation valid period of the effect button, the effect button detection switch detects that the effect button has been operated in a predetermined operation mode within that period, or the effect button is operated in a predetermined operation mode. It ends based on the fact that the period (time) has elapsed without the effect button detection switch detecting that. The operation validity period is also called "input period".

If the first effect button 63a is not operated within the operation valid period, that is, if the operation valid period elapses without the first effect button 63a being operated, the operating condition of the movable decorative member 141 is not satisfied. This may be the case (NO in S5001), or the operating conditions of the movable decorative member 141 may be satisfied based on the elapse of the operation validity period (YES in S5001).

When it is determined in S5001 that the operating conditions of the movable decorative member 141 are satisfied (YES in S5001), the driving data for moving the upper movable body 141A and the lower movable body 141B in the standby position to the operating positions (“movable effect”). (Also called drive data) is set in the sub output buffer (S5003). Further, lamp data (also referred to as “lighting data”) for causing the LEDs built in the upper movable body 141A and the lower movable body 141B to emit light (lights) is set in the sub output buffer (S5004). Further, an effect effect command for performing an effect effect on the display screen 7a when the movable decorative member 141 is in an approaching state is set in the sub output buffer (S5005).

When the movable effect drive data set in S5003 is output by the drive data output process (S4203), the upper movable body 141A and the lower movable body 141B move from the standby position to the operating position according to the movable effect drive data, respectively, and the movable decoration The member 141 is in an approaching state (see FIG. 58). Further, when the movable decorative member 141 is in an approaching state and the lighting data set in the S5004 is output by the lamp data output process (S4202), the LEDs built in the upper movable body 141A and the lower movable body 141B emit light (light). To do. Further, when the effect effect command set in S5005 is transmitted to the image control board 100 by the command transmission process (S4006), the image control microcomputer 101 transmits the image data corresponding to the effect effect command to the ROM of the image control board 100. The effect image 630 (effect image) based on the image data is displayed on the display screen 7a (see FIG. 61 (C2)).

Next, in S5007, it is determined whether or not the return condition (end condition of the movable effect) for returning the movable decorative member 141 in the approaching state to the separated state is satisfied (S5007). In this embodiment, it is determined that the return condition is satisfied when the operation end timing of the movable decorative member 141 arrives (YES in S5007).

The operation end timing (end timing of the movable effect) of the movable decorative member 141 can be appropriately set (included in the variable effect pattern) in the variable effect pattern as well as the operation start timing. For example, when the elapsed time from the movable decorative member 141 approaching is a predetermined time, or when the variable effect effect scene is switched to a specific effect scene after the movable decorative member 141 is approached. (When a specific effect is started) or the like can be set as the operation end timing of the movable decorative member 141. Further, as described above, when the operation condition of the movable decorative member 141 includes the operation of the effect button 63, for example, when a predetermined time longer than the operation valid period elapses from the start of the operation valid period (the operation valid period ends). It is also possible to set the operation end timing of the movable decorative member 141) at a predetermined time after the operation.

When it is determined in S5007 that the return condition is satisfied (YES in S5007), the drive data for moving the upper movable body 141A and the lower movable body 141B in the operating position to the standby position (also referred to as "return drive data"). ) Is set in the sub output buffer (S5009), and the lamp data (also referred to as “light-off data”) for terminating the light emission (light effect) of the LEDs built in the upper movable body 141A and the lower movable body 141B is provided. Set it in the sub output buffer (S5011) and finish this process. On the other hand, if it is determined that the return condition is not satisfied (NO in S5007), this process ends without performing the processes of S5009 and S5011.

When the return drive data set in S5009 is output by the drive data output process (S4203), the upper movable body 141A and the lower movable body 141B move from the operating position to the standby position according to the return drive data, and the movable decorative member 141 Is in a separated state (see FIG. 57). Further, when the approaching state of the movable decorative member 141 is released and the extinguishing data set in S5011 is output by the lamp data output process (S4202), the LEDs built in the upper movable body 141A and the lower movable body 141B are extinguished. ..

[Production example of Example 2]
Next, with reference to FIGS. 60 and 61, an production example of the present embodiment related to the above-mentioned movable effect-related processing (S5000) will be described. In addition, the step (S) in the description relating to the following production example corresponds to the step of the movable production related processing (S5000) described above.

In this production example, the SP reach effect is executed during the variable effect, and the first effect button 63a is at the winning branch timing at which it is determined whether the result of the variable effect is a big hit or a miss (winning) through the SP reach effect. This indicates a case where the movable effect is executed based on the operation of (big hit pattern) and a case where the movable effect is not executed (off pattern). The former is based on a jackpot variable effect pattern that includes a movable effect and a reach effect, and the latter is based on an off-variable effect pattern that includes a reach effect and does not include a movable effect. It is assumed that the contents of the production up to the branch timing (the end of the SP reach production) are the same.

FIG. 60A shows how the SP reach effect is executed (displayed) on the display screen 7a during the variable effect. When the SP reach effect progresses and the winning branch timing arrives, as shown in FIG. 60 (B), the operation promotion image 610 prompts the player to operate the first effect button 63a (pressed once in this example). It is displayed on the display screen 7a. The operation promotion image 610 is, for example, a button image imitating the appearance of the first effect button 63a (see FIG. 1) and a character image showing the operation mode of the first effect button 63a (in this example, "press once"). It can include the corresponding "press!" Character).

The operation promotion image 610 is displayed on the display screen 7a while the operation valid period of the effect button is generated. The operation valid period of this effect example starts with the arrival of the winning branch timing during the SP reach effect, and ends when a predetermined time (for example, 3 seconds) elapses from that. The length of the operation valid period can be appropriately determined by the effect pattern. An image for notifying the player that the operation valid period is in progress (for example, a level gauge image showing the remaining period until the end of the operation valid period) may be included in the operation promotion image 610.

Then, when the currently executing variation effect (the variation effect) is based on the deviation effect pattern, the first effect button 63a is operated within the operation valid period at the winning branch timing, or the operation valid period is not operated. After that, as shown in FIG. 61 (C1), the disappearance effect of displaying the disappeared image 620 on the display screen 7a is executed, and the movable effect is not executed. That is, the disappearance effect is executed as the operation corresponding effect.

The disappeared image 620 is an image showing how the operation promotion image 610 that has been displayed up to that point disappears. The disappearance effect makes the player recognize that the opportunity to operate the effect button this time did not bring about a special effect (game effect).

After the disappearance effect is executed, as shown in FIG. 61 (D1), the display screen 7a executes (displays) the deviation notification effect for notifying that the result of the variation effect (reach effect) is out of order. In the disengagement notification effect, for example, a scene in which a ally character is defeated in a confrontation with an enemy character, a scene in which the character cannot clear (achieve) a mission, or the like, an image suggesting disengagement (also referred to as a "disengagement suggestion image"). Is displayed on the display screen 7a. Further, when the disengagement notification effect is executed, the effect symbol 8 reduced and displayed at the lower right of the display screen 7a is temporarily stopped and displayed in the disengaged mode. After that, the effect symbol 8 returns to a normal size (enlarged) and is fixedly stopped in a detached mode (not shown).

On the other hand, when the variable effect currently being executed (the variable effect) is based on the jackpot variation effect pattern, the first effect button 63a is operated within the operation valid period or is operated without being operated at the winning branch timing. When the valid period elapses, the operating conditions for operating the movable decorative members 141 (upper movable body 141A and lower movable body 141B) in the separated state to bring them into an approaching state are established (YES in S5001). In response to this, the upper movable body 141A and the lower movable body 141B move from the standby position to the operating position (S5003), respectively, and the movable decorative member 141 is brought into an approaching state as shown in FIG. 61 (C2). That is, a movable effect is executed as an operation-compatible effect. The approaching state of the movable decorative member 141 is maintained until the return condition described later is satisfied.

Further, as the movable decorative member 141 approaches, the light effect is executed, the LEDs built in the upper movable body 141A and the lower movable body 141B emit light (S5004), and the effect effect is executed. The effect image 630 is displayed on the display screen 7a (S5005). That is, the light effect and the effect effect accompanying the movable effect are also executed as the operation-compatible effect.

In the effect effect of this embodiment (this effect example), as shown in FIG. 61 (C2), an effect image 630 showing how many small stars are shining is approached in front of the display screen 7a (second state). ) Is displayed so as to surround the movable decorative member 141. The mode of the effect effect and the effect image 630 is not limited to this. For example, an image that colors the surroundings of the movable decorative member 141 is displayed as an effect image, or the background of the display screen 7a is a special background dedicated to the movable effect. It is possible to take various modes such as displaying an image (special background image) as an effect image or generating a predetermined sound effect.

When the execution (start) timing of the jackpot notification effect for notifying that the result of the variation effect (reach effect) is a big hit comes after the execution of the movable effect etc. at the hit branch timing, the movable decorative member 141 in the approaching state The return condition for returning to the separated state by operating is satisfied (YES in S5007). In response to this, the upper movable body 141A and the lower movable body 141B move from the operating position to the standby position (S5009), respectively, and as shown in FIG. 61 (D2), the movable decorative member 141 is separated. At this time, the jackpot notification effect is executed (displayed) on the display screen 7a. That is, the movable decorative member 141 is in a separated state based on the execution (start) of the jackpot notification effect. Therefore, the approaching state of the movable decorative member 141 is maintained until the jackpot notification effect is executed (started). Further, as the movable decorative member 141 is separated, the LEDs built in the upper movable body 141A and the lower movable body 141B are turned off (S5011).

The jackpot notification effect is executed following the previous effect effect (see FIG. 61 (C2)). In the jackpot notification effect, the jackpot suggestion image is displayed on the display screen 7a. Further, when the jackpot notification effect is executed, the effect symbol 8 reduced and displayed at the lower right of the display screen 7a is temporarily stopped and displayed in a disengaged manner. Then, when the execution period of the jackpot notification effect elapses, the effect symbol 8 returns to a normal size (enlarged) and is fixedly stopped in the jackpot mode (not shown).

Here, the execution period (execution time) of the movable effect according to the present effect example can be appropriately set in the variable effect pattern, and is set as follows, for example. In this effect example, as described above, in the jackpot variation effect pattern, when the first effect button 63a is operated within the operation valid period at the winning branch timing, or when the operation valid period elapses without being operated, the separated state is obtained. The movable decorative member 141 in the approaching state operates and becomes an approaching state, and then, based on the execution (start) of the jackpot notification effect, the movable decorative member 141 in the approaching state operates and becomes a separated state. Of these, the period from the start of operation of the movable decorative member 141 in the separated state to the return to the separated state through the approaching state is defined as the execution period of the movable effect. The timing at which the first effect button 63a is operated within the operation valid period depends on the player, and may be operated substantially at the same time as the start of the operation valid period, or just before the end of the operation valid period. It may be operated, and it may not be operated until the end of the operation validity period. Therefore, the time from when the movable decorative member 141 starts operating based on the operation of the first effect button 63a during the operation valid period or the elapse of the operation valid period until the movable decorative member 141 returns to the separated state through the approaching state, that is, The execution period of the movable effect can vary depending on the operation status (operation timing, operation presence / absence, etc.) of the first effect button 63a. Based on this, the time required for the movable decorative member 141 to change from the separated state to the approached state and the time required for the movable decorative member 141 to change from the approached state to the separated state are both in the approaching state of the movable decorative member 141. The execution period of the movable effect is set so that it is shorter than the time maintained at.

Specifically, for example, in this effect example, the time from the start of the operation valid period to the time when the movable decorative member 141 operates and returns to the separated state through the approaching state (operation valid period + execution period of the movable effect) is set. 8 seconds, of which 3 seconds is the operation validity period. In this case, the time from when the movable decorative member 141 starts operating based on the operation of the first effect button 63a during the operation valid period or the elapse of the operation valid period until it returns to the separated state through the approaching state (that is, movable). The minimum execution period of the effect is 5 seconds (when no operation is performed), and the maximum is a little less than 8 seconds (when the operation is performed substantially at the same time as the start of the operation valid period) (5 seconds or more and less than 8 seconds). The time required for the movable decorative member 141 to change from the separated state to the approached state and the time required for the change (return) from the approached state to the separated state are set to a short time of about 0.5 to 1.0 seconds, respectively. By doing so, it is possible to secure at least 3 seconds for maintaining the movable decorative member 141 in the approaching state.

By setting the execution period of the movable effect as described above, the operation (state change) of the movable decorative member 141 and the maintenance of the approaching state are made appropriate, and the effect of the movable effect can be sufficiently obtained. Is possible.

In this embodiment (effect example), when the movable decorative member 141 changes (returns) from the approaching state to the separated state at the end of the movable effect, the upper movable body 141A and the lower movable body 141B move from the operating position to the standby position, respectively. The execution (start) timing (the timing at which the return condition is satisfied) of the jackpot notification effect is defined so that the jackpot notification effect is started at approximately the same time as the movement (return operation) of the player is started. That is, the jackpot notification effect is executed while the upper movable body 141A and the lower movable body 141B are moving from the operating position to the standby position (during the return operation). As a result, it is possible to make it appear that the big hit notification effect appears on the display screen 7a covered by the movable decorative member 141, and it is possible to enhance the visual effect of the effect.

Further, the execution period of the jackpot notification effect can be appropriately set in the variable effect pattern. In the case of this effect example, the execution period of the jackpot notification effect may be at least longer than the time (return time) required for the movable decorative member 141 to change from the approaching state to the separated state, and is shorter than the execution period of the movable effect. It can be either long or long. That is, the execution period of the jackpot notification effect may be set so that the jackpot notification effect ends after the change from the approaching state to the separated state of the movable decorative member 141 is completed (completed) (after returning to the separated state). .. By doing so, the big hit notification effect is surely executed (displayed) (continued) on the display screen 7a under the situation where the movable decorative member 141 is in the separated state, and the big hit notification effect (display screen 7a) can be displayed. This is because it is possible to ensure good visibility and show the effect to the player.

It should be noted that the movable decorative member 141 is in a separated state (the upper movable body 141A and the lower movable body 141B have returned to the standby position), that is, based on the elapse of the execution period of the movable effect (end of the movable effect). , The jackpot notification effect may be started. As a result, the jackpot notification effect is executed (displayed) on the display screen 7a under the condition that the movable decorative member 141 is in the separated state.

Here, the effect image 630 displayed in the effect effect of this embodiment (effect example) is an example of a "predetermined image", and the effect effect is a "first" display of the effect image 630 (predetermined image) on the display screen 7a. This is an example of "1 display effect". Further, the jackpot suggestion image displayed by the jackpot notification effect is an example of a "predetermined image" and a "specific image", and the jackpot suggestion effect is a "predetermined image, specific image" displayed on the display screen 7a. This is an example of "second display effect".

[Action and effect of Example 2]
In the pachinko gaming machine 1 of the present embodiment described above, when the movable decorative member 141 (movable effect member) is in the separated state (first state), the movable decoration is compared with when it is in the approaching state (second state). The portion of the display screen 7a covered by the member 141 (upper movable body 141A and lower movable body 141B) is reduced. That is, when the movable decorative member 141 is in the approaching state, the portion of the display screen 7a covered by the movable decorative member 141 (upper movable body 141A and lower movable body 141B) is larger than when the movable decorative member 141 is in the separated state (FIG. 57). , See FIG. 58). Then, the movable effect is executed, the movable decorative member 141 is brought into an approaching state, and after the effect effect (previous display effect, first display effect) is executed in that state, the jackpot notification effect (later display effect, second display effect) is executed. When the display effect) is executed, the movable decorative member 141 shifts from the approaching state to the separated state based on the execution (start) of the jackpot notification effect.

Therefore, when the big hit notification effect is executed through the movable effect and the effect effect, the movable decorative member 141 is in an approaching state before the execution of the big hit notification effect, and the movable decorative member 141 (upper movable body 141A and) The portion of the display screen 7a covered by the lower movable body 141B) is relatively large, and the effect effect is executed in that state, while the movable decorative member 141 is separated when the jackpot notification effect is executed. The portion of the display screen 7a covered by the movable decorative member 141 (upper movable body 141A and lower movable body 141B) is relatively reduced. As a result, it is possible to change the appearance of the effect when the jackpot notification effect is executed through the movable effect and the effect effect, and enhance the effect.

Further, in the pachinko gaming machine 1 of the present embodiment, the display effect (previous display effect, first display effect) executed when the movable decorative member 141 is brought close to each other by executing the movable effect displays the effect image 630 on the display screen. It is an effect effect displayed on 7a (see FIG. 61 (C2)). Therefore, the movable decorative member 141 in the approaching state and the effect image 630 displayed on the display screen 7a when the movable decorative member 141 is in the approaching state together give a visual impact to the player. Is possible. This makes it possible to enhance the effect of the movable effect when it is executed.

Further, in the pachinko gaming machine 1 of the present embodiment, the display effect (later display effect, second display effect) executed after the movable effect and effect effect (previous display effect, first display effect) is whether or not the special symbol is correct. It is a jackpot notification effect that displays a jackpot suggestion image (specific image) suggesting that the result of the determination is a jackpot (specific result) on the display screen 7a (see FIG. 61 (D2)). Therefore, it is possible to raise the player's expectation for the jackpot game (special game) from the execution of the movable effect and the effect effect to the execution of the jackpot notification effect. As a result, it is possible to further enhance the effect when the jackpot notification effect is executed through the movable effect and the effect effect.

Further, in the pachinko gaming machine 1 of the present embodiment, when the big hit notification effect is executed through the movable effect and the effect effect, the big hit notification effect ends after the movable decorative member 141 is separated. There is. Therefore, it is possible to clearly show the jackpot suggestion image displayed on the display screen 7a by executing the jackpot notification effect. This makes it possible to make the jackpot notification effect more effective.

In the second embodiment, the movable decorative member 141 including the two movable bodies 141A and 141B that move up and down is shown as an example of the movable effect member, but the movable body that operates in the left-right direction or the diagonal direction may be provided. .. Further, it may be provided with one movable body as in the above-described first embodiment, or may be provided with three or more movable bodies. That is, the movable effect member according to the second embodiment can be operated between the non-operating state (first state) and the operating state (second state), and is displayed at least when it is in the operating state (second state). As long as it is located on the front side of the screen (the front side of the display screen can be moved), the form thereof is particularly limited, and the mode of the movable effect is not particularly limited.

Further, in the second embodiment, the display effect (first display effect) executed when the movable decorative member 141 is in the approaching state (the movable effect member is in the second state) is set as the effect effect, and then the movable decorative member 141 is separated. The display effect (second display effect) that is executed in a state (the movable effect member is in the first state) is set as a jackpot notification effect, and any effect is executed during one variable effect (during a variable game). It was supposed to be. On the other hand, for example, the movable effect and the first display effect are executed during the variable effect (during the variable game), and the subsequent second display effect is executed during the opening period, the round game, etc., or the movable effect and the first display effect are executed. Is executed in the ending period, and then the second display effect is executed in the probabilistic game state, and the movable effect and the first display effect and the second display effect are different game states (two or more consecutive game states). It may be executed continuously with. Further, for example, among a plurality of consecutive (for example, twice) variable effects (variable games), the movable effect and the first display effect are executed during the previous variable effect, and the subsequent variable effect is followed by the previous variable effect. The second display effect may be executed when is started.

Further, the display effect executed according to the state change of the movable decorative member 141 (movable effect member) is not limited to the effect effect and the jackpot notification effect. For example, advance notice production (suggestion production) that gives suggestions (suggestions such as jackpot expectation and production content) related to variable production (variable game) in advance, SPSP reach production (development production) that develops from SP reach production, and production. Pseudo-continuous production in which the symbols are temporarily stopped (temporarily stopped) and then changed and displayed again, special stop production in which at least one of the three production symbols is stopped and displayed with a special symbol, promotion production during a big hit game, etc. It is possible to make various effects the first display effect and the second display effect based on the type of effect, the execution mode, the execution order (pre- and post-relationship of the effect), and the like.

Further, in the second embodiment, when the first effect button 63a (operation means) is operated within the operation valid period or when the operation valid period elapses without being operated, the movable effect is executed. Regardless of the button operation or the operation validity period, for example, the movable effect may be executed based on the arrival of a predetermined execution timing. Further, it may be provided with an effect pattern in which the movable effect is executed a plurality of times during one variable effect (during one variable game).

Next, Example 3 of the present invention will be described. In the following, the parts different from the first and second embodiments will be mainly described, and the common parts with the first and second embodiments will be omitted or simplified. Further, in the following description, different codes, the number of control steps, etc. from those of Examples 1 and 2 will be used for the configurations different (replaced) from those of Examples 1 and 2, and the common configurations are the same as those of Examples 1 and 2. The code, the number of control steps, etc. will be used.

In this embodiment, the contents of the movable effect-related processing mainly executed by the effect control microcomputer 91 (effect control means) are different from those in the above-described first and second embodiments. On the other hand, the configuration of the movable decorative member (movable effect member, movable effect means) and the mode of the movable effect of this embodiment are the same as those of the above-described second embodiment (see FIGS. 57, 58, etc.). Then, in this embodiment, the movable effect can be executed twice in a predetermined game period including the execution of the variable effect (variable game).

Specifically, when the variable effect (big hit variation effect including the movable effect) is executed based on the jackpot variation effect pattern including both the reach effect and the movable effect, the predetermined value during the variable effect (during the specific variable game). The movable effect is executed at the same time, and the movable effect is executed during the opening period of the jackpot following the end of the variable effect. That is, the movable effect is executed twice during the game period from the start of the jackpot variation effect (during the jackpot variation effect) to the end of the opening period. When the variation effect (the deviation variation effect including the movable effect) is executed based on the deviation effect variation effect pattern including both the reach effect and the movable effect, the movable effect is executed at a predetermined time during the variation effect.

[Movable production-related processing of Example 3]
Next, the movable effect-related processing (S6000) of this embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. 62. The movable effect-related process (S6000) of this embodiment replaces the movable effect-related process (S4305) of the first embodiment and the movable effect-related process (S5000) of the second embodiment.

As shown in FIG. 62, in the movable effect-related process (S6000), first, the first execution condition (start condition), which is the execution condition (start condition) of the first movable effect in the above-mentioned game period (big hit variation effect to opening period), is satisfied. It is determined whether or not it has been done (S6001). For example, when the "big hit variation effect including the movable effect" or the "off variation effect including the movable effect" is executed, the first movable effect is executed at a predetermined time during the variable effect. In this case, the execution (start) timing of the first movable effect (predetermined time during the variable effect), that is, the first operation start timing of the movable decorative member 141 is appropriately set in the variable effect pattern (variable effect). Can be included in the pattern). For example, when the SP reach production is started, or when the production scene (production content) shifts (develops) from the SP reach production to a predetermined development production, it is suggested that the result of the variable production (variable game) is a big hit. The execution timing of the first movable effect can be set when the jackpot notification effect is executed (started). In the S6001, it is determined that the first execution condition is satisfied when the execution timing of the first movable effect arrives (YES in the S6001).

The development production is, for example, in the SP reach production (variable production with SP reach), which further raises (incites) the player's expectation for the big hit, and has a higher expectation for the big hit than the SP reach production. (High expectation production). In other words, it is an advanced production of SP reach production.

Further, in addition to the arrival of the execution timing, the first execution condition may include that the effect button 63 (first effect button 63a or second effect button 63b) is operated in a predetermined operation mode. In this case, for example, the timing (also referred to as "development timing") at which the production scene during the variable production shifts (develops) from the SP reach production to the development production has arrived, and the operation of the production button that occurs when the timing arrives. When the first effect button 63a is operated in the mode of being pressed once within the valid period, it is determined that the first execution condition is satisfied (YES in S6001). If the first effect button 63a is not operated within the operation valid period, that is, if the operation valid period elapses without the first effect button 63a being operated, the first execution condition may not be satisfied. It may be good (NO in S6001), or the first execution condition may be satisfied based on the elapse of the operation validity period (YES in S6001).

Further, the first execution condition can include that the movable decorative member 141 is in a separated state, in addition to the arrival of the execution timing. In this case, for example, it is determined that the first execution condition is satisfied when the development timing from the SP reach effect to the development effect arrives during the variable effect and the movable decorative member 141 is in the separated state when the timing arrives. (YES on S6001). If the movable effect is executed (started) in a situation where the movable decorative member 141 is not in the separated state, the operating amount (operating range) and position of the movable bodies 141A and 141B constituting the movable decorative member 141 are deviated, and the movable effect is performed. This is because there is a risk that it cannot be performed normally or that troubles such as failure or damage of the movable decorative member 141 may occur. When the operation of the effect button is included in the first execution condition as described above, in addition to the arrival of the execution timing (development timing) and the arrival of the timing, the movable decorative member 141 is in a separated state, and the timing has arrived. When the effect button 63 is operated in a predetermined operation mode within the operation valid period that sometimes occurs, it is determined that the first execution condition is satisfied (YES in S6001).

To determine whether or not the movable decorative member 141 is in the separated state, for example, a sensor (standby position detecting means) capable of detecting that the upper movable body 141A and the lower movable body 141B are in the standby position is provided, and the sensor is provided. It can be performed based on the detection signal from. Then, if the detection signal is ON, it is determined that the movable decorative member 141 is in the separated state (the upper movable body 141A and the lower movable body 141B are in the standby position), and if it is OFF, the movable decorative member 141 is in the separated state (standby position). Judge that there is no. In the above-mentioned second embodiment, the fact that the movable decorative member 141 is in a separated state may be included in the operating condition (S5001) of the movable decorative member 141.

When it is determined that the first execution condition is satisfied in S6001 (YES in S6001), the movable effect drive data is set in the sub output buffer (S6003). When the set movable effect drive data is output by the drive data output process (S4203), the upper movable body 141A and the lower movable body 141B move from the standby position to the operating position according to the movable effect drive data, and the movable decorative member 141 Is approaching (see FIG. 58).

In this embodiment as well, the lighting data and the effect effect command may be set in the sub output buffer as in the second embodiment. In this way, it is possible to execute the light effect and the effect effect as the movable decorative member 141 is brought into the approaching state by executing the movable effect.

Next, in 6005, it is determined whether or not the return condition (end condition of the movable effect) for returning the movable decorative member 141 in the approaching state to the separated state is satisfied (S6005). In the present embodiment, when the end timing of the movable effect (the operation end timing of the movable decorative member 141) arrives, it is determined that the return condition is satisfied (YES in S6005).

Here, the end timing of the movable effect can be appropriately set (included in the effect pattern) in the effect pattern, similarly to the execution (start) timing of the movable effect. For example, when the second movable effect is executed after the first movable effect, the movable effect is executed at the end timing of the first movable effect (the movable decorative member 141 is in an approaching state). When the elapsed time from is reached a predetermined time (when the execution time of the movable effect has elapsed), when the effect scene of the displayed effect being executed is switched to a specific effect scene (when a specific effect is started), etc. can do.

The end timing of the first movable effect is the second movable effect (next movable effect) after the first movable effect (the previous movable effect) is executed (the movable decorative member 141 is in an approaching state). ) Is executed (also referred to as "predetermined time between movable effects"). In this case, the predetermined time (predetermined time between the movable effects) is the movable decorative member 141 that has been approached by the first movable effect (the previous movable effect), and the second movable effect (the next movable effect). It is determined in consideration of ensuring that the movable decorative member 141 is in the separated state before the execution, that is, the time required for the movable decorative member 141 to change from the approaching state to the separated state (return time).

Further, the end timing of the second movable effect or the end timing of the first movable effect when the second movable effect is not executed (for example, in the case of a deviation variation effect including the movable effect) is, for example, a movable effect. When the elapsed time from the execution of (the movable decorative member 141 is in the approaching state) reaches a predetermined time (when the execution time of the movable effect elapses), the movable effect is executed (the movable decorative member 141 It can be set when the effect scene of the display effect being executed is switched to a specific effect scene (when a specific effect is started) after the approaching state is reached.

When the execution condition of the movable effect includes the operation of the effect button 63, when a predetermined time longer than the operation valid period elapses from the start of the operation valid period of the effect button (a predetermined time after the operation valid period ends). ) Can be the end timing of the movable effect.

Further, when the first movable effect (previous movable effect) is executed based on the operation of the effect button 63, and then the second movable effect (next movable effect) is executed, the operation valid period of the effect button. When a predetermined time longer than the operation valid period elapses from the start (a predetermined time after the operation valid period ends), it is possible to set the predetermined time between the above-mentioned movable effects as the end timing of the movable effect. it can. By doing so, the movable decorative member 141 is surely separated before the execution (before the start) of the second movable effect, regardless of the operation status (operation timing, operation presence / absence, etc.) of the effect button 63 during the operation valid period. It will be possible to keep it.

Further, the execution period of the movable effect according to this embodiment can also be set as described in the above-described second embodiment (effect example).

When it is determined that the return condition is satisfied in S6005 (YES in S6005), the return drive data is set in the sub output buffer (S6007), and this process ends. When the return drive data set in the S6007 is output by the drive data output process (S4203), the upper movable body 141A and the lower movable body 141B move (return) from the operating position to the standby position according to the return drive data. On the other hand, if it is determined in S6005 that the return condition is not satisfied (NO in S6005), this process ends without performing the process in S6007.

The return drive data is set (S6007), the set return drive data is output (S4203), and the upper movable body 141A and the lower movable body 141B are moved from the operating position to the standby position based on the return drive data. The process of moving (returning the movable decorative member 141 from the approaching state to the separated state) is an example of the “returning process”.

Next, when it is determined that the first execution condition is not satisfied in the above-mentioned S6001 (NO in the S6001), the execution condition (start condition) of the second movable effect in the above-mentioned game period (big hit variation effect-opening period). ) Is determined whether or not the second execution condition is satisfied (S6009).

As described above, in the jackpot variation effect including the movable effect according to the present embodiment, the movable effect (first time) is executed at a predetermined time during the variation effect, and the jackpot opening period following the end of the variation effect. The movable effect (second time) is executed in. From this, in S6009, it is determined that the second execution condition is satisfied when the start timing of the opening period after the jackpot fluctuation effect including the movable effect arrives (YES in S6009). That is, the start timing of the opening period is the execution (start) timing of the second movable effect.

Similar to the first execution condition described above, the second execution condition can include that the effect button 63 is operated in a predetermined operation mode and that the movable decorative member 141 is in a separated state.

Then, when it is determined that the second execution condition is satisfied in S6009 (YES in S6009), the above-mentioned processing of S6003 is performed, and when it is determined that the second execution condition is not satisfied (NO in S6009), S6005 is performed without processing S6003. Move to the processing of. The second movable effect is executed by the processing of S6003 based on the establishment of the second execution condition.

Here, after the execution of the first movable effect (S6003), after the return drive data is set by the establishment of the return condition (YES in S6005) (S6007), the execution (start) timing of the second movable effect arrives. Before (before the second execution condition is satisfied), it is checked whether or not the movable decorative member 141 is in the separated state (whether or not the movable bodies 141A and 141B are in the standby position), and if it is not in the separated state, it is checked. , The return drive data may be set again, and a process (return process) for returning the movable decorative member 141 from the approaching state to the separated state may be performed. By doing so, it is possible to increase the certainty that the movable decorative member 141 is kept in the separated state before the execution (before the start) of the second movable effect.

[Production example of Example 3]
Next, with reference to FIGS. 63 and 64, an production example of the present embodiment related to the above-mentioned movable effect-related processing (S6000) will be described. In addition, the step (S) in the description relating to the following production example corresponds to the step of the movable production related processing (S6000) described above.

In this production example, during the execution of the jackpot variation effect including the movable effect, the first movable effect is executed based on the operation of the first effect button 63a at the development timing from the SP reach effect to the development effect, and then the variation. It shows the case where the second movable effect is executed based on the start of the opening period of the jackpot following the effect (transition from the variable effect to the opening effect).

FIG. 63 (A) shows how the SP reach effect is executed (displayed) on the display screen 7a during the variable effect. When the SP reach effect progresses and the development timing arrives, as shown in FIG. 63 (B), an operation promotion image 610 that prompts the player to operate the first effect button 63a (pressed once in this example) is displayed. It is displayed on the screen 7a. Up to this point, it is the same as the production example of the second embodiment described above (see FIGS. 60A and 60B). The operation promotion image 610 is an example of a "predetermined image" displayed before the execution of the first movable effect.

Then, when the first effect button 63a is operated within the operation valid period at the development timing, or when the operation valid period elapses without being operated, the execution condition (first execution condition) of the first movable effect is satisfied. (YES on S6001). In response to this, the upper movable body 141A and the lower movable body 141B move from the standby position to the operating position (S6003), respectively, and the movable decorative member 141 is brought into an approaching state as shown in FIG. 63 (C). This approaching state is maintained until the return condition described later is satisfied.

In this embodiment (effect example), the operation valid period of the effect button is set to 3 seconds, and the time from the start of the operation valid period until the movable decorative member 141 operates and returns to the separated state through the approaching state (operation valid period). + Execution period of movable production) is set to 6 seconds. Therefore, the execution period of the movable effect is 3 seconds at the shortest (when there is no operation) and 6 seconds at the longest (when the operation is performed almost at the same time as the start of the effective operation period) (3 seconds or more and less than 6 seconds). ..

When the execution (start) timing of the development effect arrives after the execution of the first movable effect, the return condition for returning the movable decorative member 141 in the approaching state to the separated state is satisfied (YES in S6005). In response to this, the upper movable body 141A and the lower movable body 141B move from the operating position to the standby position (S6007), respectively, and as shown in FIG. 63 (D), the movable decorative member 141 is separated. At this time, the development effect is executed (displayed) on the display screen 7a. That is, the movable decorative member 141 is in a separated state based on the execution (start) of the development effect. Therefore, the approaching state of the movable decorative member 141 is maintained until the development effect is executed (started).

In this embodiment (effect example), when the movable decorative member 141 changes (returns) from the approaching state to the separated state at the end of the first movable effect, the upper movable body 141A and the lower movable body 141B are moved from the operating positions, respectively. The execution (start) timing (the timing at which the return condition is satisfied) of the development effect is defined so that the development effect is started at approximately the same time as the movement to the standby position (return operation) is started. That is, the development effect is executed while the upper movable body 141A and the lower movable body 141B are moving from the operating position to the standby position (during the return operation). As a result, it is possible to make it appear that the development effect appears on the display screen 7a covered by the movable decorative member 141, and it is possible to enhance the visual effect of the effect.

Further, the execution period of the development effect can be appropriately set in the variable effect pattern. In the case of this effect example, the execution period of the development effect may be longer than the time (return time) required for the movable decorative member 141 to change from the approaching state to the separated state, and may be shorter or longer than the execution period of the movable effect. Can be either. That is, the execution period of the development effect may be set so that the development effect ends after the change from the approaching state to the separated state of the movable decorative member 141 is completed (completed) (after returning to the separated state). By doing so, the development effect is surely executed (displayed) (continued) on the display screen 7a under the situation where the movable decorative member 141 is in the separated state, and the development effect (display screen 7a) is good. This is because it is possible to ensure visibility and show the effect to the player.

The movable decorative member 141 has been separated (the upper movable body 141A and the lower movable body 141B have returned to the standby positions), that is, the elapse of the execution period of the first movable effect (the first movable effect). The development effect may be started based on the end of). As a result, the development effect is executed (displayed) on the display screen 7a under the condition that the movable decorative member 141 is in the separated state.

Then, when the execution period of the development effect elapses, as shown in FIG. 64 (E), the effect symbol 8 returns to a normal size (enlarged) and is fixedly stopped in the jackpot mode. After that, when the start timing of the big hit opening period arrives, the execution condition (second execution condition) of the second movable effect is satisfied (YES in S6009). In response to this, the upper movable body 141A and the lower movable body 141B move from the standby position to the operating position (S6003), respectively, and the movable decorative member 141 is brought into an approaching state as shown in FIG. 64 (F). The effect symbol 8 (big hit effect symbol) that is stopped and displayed (fixed stop) in the jackpot mode is an example of a "predetermined image" that is displayed before the execution of the second movable effect.

When the time (for example, 3 seconds) for maintaining the approaching state of the movable decorative member 141 by the second movable effect elapses, the return condition for returning the movable decorative member 141 in the approaching state to the separated state is satisfied (S6005). The movable body 141A and the lower movable body 141B move from the operating position to the standby position, respectively (S6007). As a result, the second movable effect is completed, and the big hit game effect such as the opening effect and the round effect is executed (displayed) on the display screen 7a in which the entire movable effect can be visually recognized by the end of the movable effect.

In this production example, the flow of the production from the execution of the jackpot fluctuation production including the movable production (SP reach production) to the opening period is shown, but the first movable production should also be executed in the out-of-range fluctuation production. Is possible. That is, in the deviation variation effect including the movable effect, the development effect is executed according to the flow shown in FIGS. 63 (A) to 63 (D), and the deviation notification effect (see FIG. 61 (D1)) is executed following the development effect. It is possible.

[Action and effect of Example 3]
In the pachinko gaming machine 1 of the present embodiment described above, the movable effect of operating the movable decorative member 141 (movable effect member) in the separated state (first state) to bring it into the approaching state (second state) is a big hit. It is executed twice in the game period (predetermined game period) from the start of the variable effect to the end of the opening period after the variable effect. Specifically, it is executed at a total of two timings, that is, the development timing from the SP reach production to the development production during the jackpot fluctuation production and the opening period start timing after the fluctuation production (see FIGS. 63 and 64). ). Then, between the execution of the first movable effect (previous movable effect) and the execution of the second movable effect (next movable effect), the movable decorative member 141 in the approaching state is operated. It is possible to execute the return process to put it in the separated state. Therefore, the movable decorative member 141 that has been brought into the approaching state by the execution of the first movable effect can be separated before the execution of the second movable effect. As a result, it is possible to accurately execute the movable effect twice in the above-mentioned game period and improve the effect of the effect in the game period.

Further, in the pachinko gaming machine 1 of the present embodiment, a gaming period (in this example, a jackpot variation effect) including the execution of a variable game (specific variable game) based on the result of the special symbol winning / failing determination being a jackpot (specific result) is being executed. ~ Opening period), the movable effect is executed twice. As a result, it is possible to raise the player's expectation for the big hit game (special game) by the movable production.

Further, in the pachinko gaming machine 1 of the present embodiment, during the execution of the variation effect, the first movable effect is executed after the operation promotion image 610 is displayed on the display screen 7a (see FIGS. 63 (B) and 63 (C)). ), When the variation effect is a jackpot variation effect, the second movable effect is executed after the effect symbol 8 is stopped and displayed (fixed stop) in the jackpot mode on the display screen 7a (FIG. 64 (E)). , (F)). Therefore, the display of the operation promotion image 610 and the stop display of the effect symbol 8 (display of a predetermined image) can be used as an opportunity to attract the player to the movable effect to be executed thereafter. This makes it possible to enhance the interest when the movable effect is executed.

Further, in the pachinko gaming machine 1 of the present embodiment, of the two movable effects executed from the execution of the jackpot fluctuation effect (SP reach effect) to the opening period, the first movable effect is the first effect button 63a (operation). It is executed based on the operation of the means). Therefore, at least one movable effect can be executed as an operation-compatible effect based on the operation of the effect button. This makes it possible to enhance the interest when the movable effect is executed. In particular, by executing the first movable effect as an operation-compatible effect, it becomes easier to give the player an impact when the movable effect is executed.

Also in the third embodiment, as in the second embodiment, the movable decorative member 141 including the two movable bodies 141A and 141B that move up and down is shown as an example of the movable effect member, but the movable body that operates in the left-right direction or the diagonal direction is movable. It may be provided with a body. Further, it may be provided with one movable body as in the above-described first embodiment, or may be provided with three or more movable bodies. That is, as long as the movable effect member according to the third embodiment can be operated between the non-operating state (first state) and the operating state (second state), the form thereof is particularly limited, and the movable effect aspect is also included. It doesn't matter.

Further, in the third embodiment, the movable production is executed at a total of two timings, that is, the development timing from the SP reach production during the jackpot fluctuation production to the development production and the opening period start timing after the fluctuation production. However, the number of executions and the execution timing of the movable effect are not limited to this, and for example, the movable effect can be executed two or three times or more during one variable effect (during a variable game). May be good. In this case, the execution conditions of the movable effect can be set as the third execution condition, the fourth execution condition, and the like in addition to the above-mentioned first execution condition (S6001) and second execution condition (S6009). is there.

As an effect pattern when the movable effect is executed multiple times during one variable effect (during a variable game), for example, the first movable effect is executed from the start of the variable display of the effect symbol to the establishment of reach, and the reach is achieved. The second movable effect is executed from the establishment to the start of the development effect, and the third movable effect is executed from the development effect to the stop display of the effect symbol (fixed stop display, that is, the end of the variable effect). A pattern can be exemplified. In this case, the return processing of the movable effect member is executed at a predetermined time between each movable effect.

In addition, during the period in which the pseudo-continuous effect of temporarily stopping (temporarily stopping) the effect symbol and then displaying the variation again is executed, the movable effect is executed according to the number of times the effect symbol is temporarily stopped and re-variated (the number of pseudo-continuous effects). It may be done. Specifically, after the start of the variable display (variable game) of the effect symbol, the first movable effect is executed with the start of the first temporary stop or re-variation, and with the start of the first temporary stop or re-variation. The first movable effect is executed, the second movable effect is executed with the second temporary stop or re-variation start, and the third movable effect is executed with the third temporary stop or re-variation start. It is also possible to exemplify a pattern in which a movable effect is executed a number of times according to the number of pseudo-reams. Also in this case, the return processing of the movable effect member is executed at a predetermined time between each movable effect.

Further, in the third embodiment, of the two movable effects, the first movable effect is executed based on the operation of the effect button (that is, the operation-compatible effect), and the second movable effect is the effect button. It is assumed that the operation is executed based on the arrival of a predetermined execution timing regardless of the operation and the operation validity period (also referred to as "non-operation corresponding effect" or "non-operation effect"). On the other hand, the second movable effect may be an operation-compatible effect, or both the first and second movable effects may be non-operation-compatible effects (non-operation-compatible effects). Further, when the movable effect is executed three times or more as described above, the movable effect of all times may be an operation-compatible effect or a non-operation-compatible effect (non-operation-compatible effect), or the movable effect executed as an operation-compatible effect. The effect and the movable effect executed as the non-operation compatible effect may be mixed.

Further, in the third embodiment, the movable effect is executed after the operation promotion image 610 and the effect symbol 8 in the jackpot mode are displayed, but the image (predetermined image) displayed before the execution of the movable effect is this. It is not limited to. For example, the movable effect may be executed after the image (movable effect notice image) for which the execution of the movable effect (operation of the movable effect member) is announced in advance is displayed.

Although examples have been described above as embodiments of the present invention, the present invention is not limited to this, and is limited to the wording of each claim as long as it does not deviate from the scope of each claim. However, it extends to the extent that those skilled in the art can easily replace them, and it is possible to appropriately add improvements based on the knowledge that those skilled in the art usually have.

For example, in the above-described embodiment, whether or not the probability variation function is activated based on whether or not the game ball has passed (passed through V) a specific area in the second big winning opening 35 (V attacker) during the jackpot game. The present invention is not limited to this, although an example is shown in which the present invention is applied to a V-probability machine for determining whether or not. For example, the present invention can be applied to one type of pachinko gaming machine (so-called “design probability changer”) that determines whether or not to activate the probability fluctuation function based on the type of jackpot symbol. Alternatively, a game ball that has a specific area (V area) in the large winning opening that can be entered when the result of the special symbol winning / failing judgment is a small hit, and that has entered the large winning opening during the small hit game It is also possible to apply the present invention to a type 1 and type 2 type pachinko game machine in which a big hit is obtained when passing through a specific area (passing through V) and a big hit game is executed.

Further, in the above-described embodiment, an example in which the present invention is applied to a so-called ST machine is illustrated, but a pachinko gaming machine of a type in which a game in a high probability state (probability variation game state) is guaranteed until the next big hit occurs (so-called pachinko game machine). The present invention can also be applied to a "probability variation loop machine"). In addition, a pachinko gaming machine (so-called "fall lottery machine") that performs a lottery (so-called "fall lottery") as to whether or not to end the high-probability state each time the special figure fluctuation display (variable game) starts in the high probability state. ”), The present invention can also be applied.

Further, in the above-described embodiment, the player is given a game privilege of generating a high probability state based on the fact that the game ball has passed through a specific area in the V round during the big hit game. The privilege referred to in the invention is not limited to the occurrence of a high probability state. For example, it gives some benefit to the player, such as a high base state in which the frequency of entering the game ball into the starting port is high, and a fluctuation time shortening state (time reduction state) in which the fluctuation time of the identification information is shorter than usual. If so, the content (type) of the benefit does not matter. Further, based on the fact that the game ball has passed through the specific area, one privilege may be given or a plurality of benefits may be given.

Further, in the above-described embodiment, the control process (so-called "special figure 2") in which the second special symbol hold (variation display of the second special symbol) is preferentially digested over the first special figure hold (variation display of the first special symbol) is performed. Although "priority change") was adopted, the present invention is not limited to this, and a control process (so-called "special figure 1 priority change") may be used in which the first special figure hold is preferentially digested over the second special figure hold. Alternatively, no priority is set for the digestion of the first special figure hold and the digestion of the second special figure hold, and the oldest memorized one of the first special figure hold and the second special figure hold is digested in order. It may be the control process of the control process (so-called “ball entry order (memory order) fluctuation”). In addition, a control process (so-called "special figure 1,") that executes the variation display of the first special symbol and the variation display of the second special symbol (digestion of the first special symbol hold and digestion of the second special symbol hold) in parallel is performed. 2 Simultaneous fluctuation ") may be adopted.

Further, in the above-described embodiment, the latest acquired random number value (acquired information) stored in the special figure hold storage unit is read out for the preliminary determination based on the starting entry ball, and the read acquired random number value (acquired information) is determined ( Although it was supposed to be performed (preliminary determination) (see the start-in ball processing (S209), FIGS. 11, 37, etc.), the pre-determination method is not limited to this. For example, in addition to the special figure reservation storage unit, a main control unit or a sub-control unit stores an area (acquisition information storage means) for storing acquisition information (that is, acquisition information acquired based on the start-in ball) to be determined in advance. It may be provided in the RAM of the unit and the acquired information stored in the storage area (predetermination storage unit) may be determined (predetermined). In this case, by storing the result of the pre-determination in the RAM of the main control unit or the sub-control unit, it is possible to erase the acquired information (acquired information stored in another storage area) used for the pre-determination. Alternatively, instead of pre-determining the acquired information stored in the special figure reservation storage unit, the acquired information acquired based on the starting entry may be pre-determined. That is, the acquired information may be determined in advance before being stored in the special figure reservation storage unit. In this case, it is not necessary to provide an area for storing the acquired information to be pre-determined separately from the special figure holding storage unit, and it is also necessary to read the acquired information stored in the special figure holding storage unit for the pre-determination. Absent.

Further, in the above-described embodiment, the jackpot probability can be set to a low probability (first probability) or a high probability (second probability) by inactivating / operating the probability fluctuation function, but the type (number) of the jackpot probability is It is not limited to this, and even if three or more kinds of probabilities can be set, for example, a medium probability (third probability) higher than a low probability (first probability) and lower than a high probability (second probability). Good. Further, the first low probability and the first high probability (first probability condition), the second low probability and the second high probability (second probability condition), the third low probability and the third high probability (third probability condition), etc. , Multiple types of probability conditions that define the relationship between low probability and high probability are provided, and any of the multiple types of probability conditions can be arbitrarily set (selectable) when the power of the game machine is turned on, for example. May be good.

Further, in the above-described embodiment, the game medium used for the game is a game ball, and a pachinko game machine (ball game) capable of advancing the game by firing the game ball toward the game board surface (game area). An example of applying the present invention to a machine) is illustrated, but the game medium used for the game is a game medal, and the game can be advanced by inserting the game medal and rotating / stopping the reel (rotating body). The present invention is also applicable to a possible slot machine (reel type gaming machine).

[Other]
Hereinafter, inventions related to the embodiments (Examples, other embodiments) disclosed in the present specification will be disclosed as reference inventions.

(Reference Invention 1)
Conventionally, a game machine that plays a game using a game medium such as a game ball or a game medal is known. In this type of gaming machine, there are those configured so that various effects using an image display unit for effects, movable accessories, and the like are executed according to the progress of the game (for example, Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2013-). 59691 (see).

The production performed by the game machine plays an important role in improving the interest of the game, but there is room for further improvement in enhancing the production effect.

The present reference invention 1 has been made in view of the above circumstances, and an object of the present invention is to provide a game machine having an enhanced effect.

The gaming machine of Reference Invention 1-1 is
A game machine capable of playing a game using a predetermined game medium.
A display screen that can display images and
A movable effect member that can operate between the first state and the second state,
Equipped with an effect control means that can control the effect executed with the game,
For the above production
The first display effect of displaying a predetermined image on the display screen and
A second display effect that displays a predetermined image on the display screen, and
There is a movable effect that activates the movable effect member in the first state to bring the movable effect member into the second state.
The effect control means
The first display effect and the movable effect can be executed based on the establishment of a predetermined execution condition.
It is possible to keep the movable effect member in the second state by executing the movable effect in the second state even after the end of the first display effect.
After the end of the first display effect, the second display effect can be executed while maintaining the second state of the movable effect member.

According to such a game machine, when the first display effect and the movable effect are executed, the movable effect member that has been in the second state due to the movable effect is in the second state even after the end of the first display effect. , The second display effect can be executed while maintaining that state. Therefore, the movable effect member is maintained in the activated state (second state) from the execution of the first display effect to the execution of the second display effect. As a result, it is possible to relate the first display effect, the movable effect, and the second display effect, and enhance the effect when these effects are executed.

The gaming machine of Reference Invention 1-2 is the gaming machine of Reference Invention 1-1 described above.
The effect control means is characterized in that it can perform an effect using the movable effect member in the second state.

According to such a game machine, after the movable effect member is in the second state by executing the movable effect, another effect using the movable effect member can be further executed in that state. This makes it possible to further enhance the effect.

The gaming machine of Reference Invention 1-3 is the gaming machine of Reference Invention 1-1 or 1-2 described above.
Equipped with a game state control means capable of controlling the game state when the game is performed,
The gaming state includes at least a first gaming state and a second gaming state.
The effect control means
The first display effect can be executed in the first game state,
It is characterized in that the second display effect can be executed in the second game state.

According to such a game machine, since the first display effect is executed in the first game state and the second display effect is executed in the second game state, the first display effect, the movable effect, and the second display effect Is executed, the movable effect member is maintained in the activated state (second state) across the two gaming states. This makes it possible to enhance the effect of the effect between the gaming states.

The gaming machine of Reference Invention 1-4 is the gaming machine of any one of Reference Inventions 1-1 to 1-3 described above.
Equipped with an operation means that can be operated by the player
The effect control means
The movable effect member in the second state can be returned to the first state based on the fact that a predetermined end condition is satisfied or the operation means is operated before the end condition is satisfied. It is characterized by being.

According to such a game machine, if a predetermined end condition is satisfied after the movable effect member is in the second state by executing the movable effect, or if the operating means is operated before the end condition is satisfied, The movable effect member in the second state returns (returns) to the first state. Therefore, even if the end condition is not satisfied, the movable effect member can be returned (returned) to the first state at the player's will. This makes it possible to improve the functionality of the game machine provided with the movable effect member.

The gaming machine of Reference Invention 1-5 is
In a game machine capable of performing a predetermined game
An effect control means that controls the effect executed as the game progresses,
Display means that can display production images and
A movable effect member that can be displaced from the standby position to the operating position while it is in the standby position when it is not operating,
Equipped with an operation means that can be operated by the player,
The effect control means causes the display means to display an image of a predetermined effect based on the establishment of a predetermined effect condition, and displaces the movable effect member from the standby position to the operating position.
The movable effect member may continue to be located at the operating position even when the predetermined effect is completed and an image of the effect different from the predetermined effect is displayed on the display means.
The effect control means is characterized in that the movable effect member can be returned to the standby position based on the operation of the operation means when the movable effect member is not in the standby position. ..

According to such a game machine, it is possible to return the movable effect member displaced from the standby position to the operating position to the standby position at an arbitrary timing.

According to the above-mentioned Reference Invention 1, it is possible to provide a game machine having an enhanced effect.

(Reference Invention 2)
The present reference invention 2 has been made to solve the same problems as the above-mentioned reference invention 1.

The gaming machine of Reference Invention 2-1 is
A game machine capable of playing a game using a predetermined game medium.
A display screen that can display images and
A movable effect member that can operate between the first state and the second state,
Equipped with an effect control means that can control the effect executed with the game,
For the above production
The first display effect of displaying a predetermined image on the display screen and
A second display effect that displays a predetermined image on the display screen, and
There is a movable effect that activates the movable effect member in the first state to bring the movable effect member into the second state.
When the movable effect member is in the first state, the portion of the display screen covered by the movable effect member is smaller than that in the second state.
The effect control means
While executing the movable effect, the first display effect is executed while maintaining the movable effect member in the second state due to the execution of the movable effect in the second state, and then the second display effect is executed. Is possible and
When the second display effect is executed after the movable effect and the first display effect, the movable effect member is operated based on the execution of the second display effect to bring the first state to the first state.

According to such a game machine, when the movable effect member is in the first state, the portion of the display screen covered by the movable effect member is smaller than when it is in the second state. That is, when the movable effect member is in the second state, the portion of the display screen covered by the movable effect member is larger than when it is in the first state. Then, when the movable effect is executed and the movable effect member is in the second state, the first display effect is executed in that state, and then the second display effect is executed, based on the execution of the second display effect. The movable effect member shifts from the second state to the first state. Therefore, when the second display effect is executed after the movable effect and the first display effect, the movable effect member is in the second state and is covered by the movable effect member before the execution of the second display effect. The portion of the display screen is relatively large, and the first display effect is executed in that state, while when the second display effect is executed, the movable effect member is in the first state, and the movable effect member causes the movable effect member. The part of the display screen that is covered is relatively small. As a result, it is possible to change the appearance of the effect when the second display effect is executed through the movable effect and the first display effect, and enhance the effect.

The gaming machine of Reference Invention 2-2 is the gaming machine of Reference Invention 2-1 described above.
The first display effect is characterized in that a predetermined effect image is displayed on the display screen.

According to such a game machine, in the first display effect executed in which the movable effect member is in the second state by executing the movable effect, a predetermined effect image is displayed on the display screen. Therefore, the movable effect member in the second state and the effect image displayed on the display screen when the movable effect member is in the second state can be combined to give a visual impact to the player. It becomes. This makes it possible to enhance the effect of the movable effect when it is executed.

The gaming machine of Reference Invention 2-3 is the gaming machine of Reference Invention 2-1 or 2-2 described above.
When the result of the determination executed based on the establishment of the predetermined condition is a specific result, it is possible to execute a special game in which a predetermined benefit can be given to the player.
The effect control means can control the effect based on the result of the determination.
The second display effect is characterized in that a specific image suggesting that the result of the determination is the specific result is displayed on the display screen.

According to such a game machine, in the second display effect executed through the movable effect and the first display effect, a specific image suggesting that the result of the determination is a specific result is displayed on the display screen. To. Therefore, it is possible to increase the player's expectation for the special game from the execution of the movable effect and the first display effect to the execution of the second display effect. As a result, it is possible to further enhance the effect when the second display effect is executed after the movable effect and the first display effect.

The gaming machine of Reference Invention 2-4 is the gaming machine of any one of Reference Inventions 2-1 to 2-3 described above.
The movable effect and the second display effect executed after the first display effect are characterized in that the movable effect member ends after the movable effect member is in the first state.

According to such a game machine, when the second display effect is executed after the movable effect and the first display effect, the second display effect ends after the movable effect member is in the first state. Therefore, it is possible to clearly show the image displayed on the display screen by executing the second display effect. This makes it possible to make the second display effect more effective.

The gaming machine of Reference Invention 2-5 is
In a gaming machine that is controlled to a special gaming state that is advantageous to the player based on the establishment of predetermined control conditions.
A display device with a display screen and
A movable body that can be displaced in front of the display screen,
A movable body control means capable of at least displacementing the movable body to a predetermined standby position or an operating position in which the display screen is hidden more than the standby position.
Operable operating means and
Judgment information acquisition means for acquiring judgment information based on the entry of a game ball into a ball entry port provided in the game area, and
A determination means that makes a determination based on the determination information acquired by the determination information acquisition means, and
An identification symbol display means that displays a variable display of the identification symbol indicating the result of the determination and then stops the display.
A variable effect executing means for executing a variable effect that displays a predetermined effect symbol on the display screen in a variable manner and then stops and displays the display in a stop mode indicating the result of the determination.
After the identification symbol is stopped and displayed in a specific mode indicating that the result of the determination is a specific result, a special game executing means for executing a special game for opening the special entry port provided in the game area, and a special game executing means. With
When the result of the determination is a specific result, the variation effect executing means executes a specific notification effect for notifying that the result of the determination is a specific result as at least a part of the variation effect.
The movable body control means
After the movable body in the standby position is displaced to the operating position based on the establishment of the predetermined start condition, the movable body is maintained in the operating position, and the movable body in the operating position is maintained based on the establishment of the predetermined end condition. The movable body in the operating position is displaced to the standby position.
The start condition is at least satisfied based on a specific operation on the operating means.
The end condition is characterized in that it is at least satisfied based on the execution of the specific notification effect by the variable effect executing means.

According to such a game machine, it is possible to give a new interest by using a movable body that can be displaced in front of the display screen.

According to the above-mentioned Reference Invention 2, it is possible to provide a game machine having an enhanced effect.

(Reference Invention 3)
The present reference invention 3 is made to solve the same problems as the above reference invention 1.

The gaming machine of Reference Invention 3-1 is
A gaming machine capable of executing a special game in which a predetermined profit can be given to a player when the result of a determination executed based on the establishment of a predetermined condition is a specific result.
A variable game execution means capable of executing a variable game in which the identification information is variablely displayed and then stopped and displayed based on the result of the determination, and
A movable effect member that can operate between the first state and the second state,
A movable control means capable of controlling the movable effect member is provided.
The movable effect of operating the movable effect member in the first state to bring the second state to the second state can be executed a plurality of times in a predetermined game period including the execution of the variable game.
The movable control means is in the second state between the execution of the previous movable effect and the execution of the next movable effect among the plurality of times the movable effect executed in the game period. It is characterized in that it is possible to execute the return process of operating the movable effect member to bring it into the first state.

According to such a game machine, when the movable effect of operating the movable effect member in the first state to be in the second state is executed a plurality of times in a predetermined game period including the execution of the variable game, the movable effect is executed. Of the multiple movable effects, between the execution of the previous movable effect and the execution of the next movable effect, the return process of operating the movable effect member in the second state to the first state is performed. It is said to be executable. Therefore, the movable effect member that has been in the second state due to the execution of the previous movable effect among the plurality of movable effects can be set to the first state before the execution of the next movable effect. As a result, it is possible to accurately execute a plurality of movable effects during the game period including the execution of the variable game, and to improve the effect of the effect during the game period.

The gaming machine of Reference Invention 3-2 is the gaming machine of Reference Invention 3-1 described above.
It is characterized in that the movable effect can be executed a plurality of times during the game period including the execution of the variable game based on the result of the determination being the specific result.

According to such a game machine, the movable effect can be executed a plurality of times during the game period including the execution of the variable game based on the determination result being the specific result. As a result, it is possible to raise the player's expectation for the special game by the movable effect.

The gaming machine of Reference Invention 3-3 is the gaming machine of Reference Invention 3-1 or 3-2 described above.
Equipped with a display means that can display images
The movable effect of at least one of the plurality of times of the movable effect executed in the game period is executed after the predetermined image is displayed on the display means.

According to such a game machine, when the movable effect is executed a plurality of times during the game period including the execution of the variable game, the movable effect is executed at least once after the predetermined image is displayed. Therefore, it is possible to attract the player to the subsequent movable production triggered by the display of the predetermined image. This makes it possible to enhance the interest when the movable effect is executed.

The gaming machine of Reference Invention 3-4 includes an operating means that can be operated by any one of the above-mentioned Reference Inventions 3-1 to 3-3.
The movable effect of at least one of the plurality of times of the movable effect executed during the game period is characterized in that it is executed based on the operation of the operating means.

According to such a game machine, when the movable effect is executed a plurality of times during the game period including the execution of the variable game, at least one movable effect is executed based on the operation of the operating means by the player. .. Therefore, the movable effect once out of a plurality of times can be executed as one based on the operation of the operation means (operation corresponding effect). This makes it possible to enhance the interest when the movable effect is executed.

The gaming machine of Reference Invention 3-5 is
Input detection means that detects input by the player,
Movable effect means that can operate based on the input detection means detecting the input, and
A control means for controlling the operation of the movable effect means and
An effect execution means that performs a predetermined effect according to the progress of the game,
With
The control means
Based on the fact that the input detecting means detects the input within a predetermined input period, the first operation control that sets the movable effect means in the first state as the second state, and
A second operation control that sets the movable effect means in the second state to the first state at a predetermined time after the input period ends.
Is to do
As the mode of the effect, the first operation in which the movable effect means is in the second state based on the detection of the input by the input detection means within the input period, and the predetermined operation after the end of the input period. It has a movable effect mode including a second operation in which the movable effect means is in the second state after the timing.
The control means is characterized in that at least the second operation control can be executed when the effect of the movable effect mode is performed.

According to such a game machine, after the operation of the movable effect means (first operation) based on the detection of the input by the input detection means (input by the player) within the input period (first operation), the operation of the next movable effect means (operation). The second operation) is started from the first state regardless of the input detection time (input by the player) by the input detection means within the previous input period, so that the input period is within the input period. Prevents both the effect of the operation of the movable effect means (first operation) based on the detection of input (input by the player) and the effect of the subsequent operation of the movable effect means (second operation) from being impaired. It becomes possible.

According to the above-mentioned Reference Invention 3, it is possible to provide a game machine having an enhanced effect.

1 Pachinko game machine, 2 game board, 3 game area, 4 rail member, 5 board lamp, 7 image display device, 7a display screen, 7b effect symbol display area (effect symbol display section), 8 effect symbol, 9a 1st effect Hold, 9b 2nd production hold, 10 center decoration, 14 movable decoration member, 16 game nail, 19 fixed winning device, 20 1st starting port, 21 2nd starting port, 22 variable winning device, 23 opening / closing member, 30th 1 big winning opening, 31 1st big winning device, 32 opening / closing member, 35 2nd big winning opening (V attacker), 36 2nd big winning device, 37 opening / closing member, 39 specific area, 40 main indicator, 41a 1st Special symbol display (1st special symbol display), 41b 2nd special symbol display (2nd special symbol display), 50 game machine frame, 51 front frame, 52 main body frame, 53 outer frame, 60 launch handle, 63a 1st effect button, 63b 2nd effect button, 66 frame lamp, 67 speaker, 80 main control board (main control unit), 90 sub control board (sub control unit), 100 image control board (image control unit), 141 Movable decorative member, 141A upper movable body, 141B lower movable body, 500 broadcast image, 510 effect image (telop image), 610 operation promotion image, 630 effect image.

Claims (4)

A game machine capable of playing a game using a predetermined game medium.
A display screen that can display images and
A movable effect member that can operate between the first state and the second state,
Equipped with an effect control means that can control the effect executed with the game,
For the above production
The first display effect of displaying a predetermined image on the display screen and
A second display effect that displays a predetermined image on the display screen, and
There is a movable effect that activates the movable effect member in the first state to bring the movable effect member into the second state.
When the movable effect member is in the first state, the portion of the display screen covered by the movable effect member is smaller than that in the second state.
The effect control means
While executing the movable effect, the first display effect is executed while maintaining the movable effect member in the second state due to the execution of the movable effect in the second state, and then the second display effect is executed. Is possible and
When the second display effect is executed after the movable effect and the first display effect, the game is characterized in that the movable effect member is operated based on the execution of the second display effect to bring the first state. Machine. The gaming machine according to claim 1, wherein the first display effect is to display a predetermined effect image on the display screen. When the result of the determination executed based on the establishment of the predetermined condition is a specific result, it is possible to execute a special game in which a predetermined benefit can be given to the player.
The effect control means can control the effect based on the result of the determination.
The gaming machine according to claim 1 or 2, wherein the second display effect is to display a specific image suggesting that the result of the determination is the specific result on the display screen. Any one of claims 1 to 3, wherein the movable effect and the second display effect executed after the first display effect are terminated after the movable effect member is in the first state. The game machine described in.

Images